2020 Cadillac CT4 Owner's Manual | Cadillac Canada

View the Owner’s Manual for the 2020 Cadillac CT4 to learn more about your vehicle’s features and maintenance.

Cadillac

2020 Cadillac CT4 Owner's Manual | Cadillac Canada - GM ...

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference. ... manual. 7. Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 86. 8. Infotainment 0 133. 9. Light Sensor. See Automatic.

M Y CM CT4

Using this Manual To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found. Danger, Warning, and Caution Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce ...

Current View
2020-cadillac-ct4-owners-manual-english
CT4

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . . . . . . 7 Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Instruments and Controls . . . . . . . . . . 85 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 302 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . 331 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

2 INTRODUCTION
Introduction
The names, logos, emblems, slogans, vehicle model names, and vehicle body designs appearing in this manual including, but not limited to, GM, the GM logo, the CADILLAC Emblem, and CADILLAC CT4 are trademarks and/or service marks of General Motors LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name "General Motors of Canada Company" for Cadillac Motor Car Division wherever it appears in this manual. This manual describes features that may or may not be on the vehicle because of optional equipment that was not purchased on the vehicle,
Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 84186799 A First Printing

model variants, country specifications, features/applications that may not be available in your region, or changes subsequent to the printing of this owner's manual.
Refer to the purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm the features.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Canadian Vehicle Owners
A French language manual can be obtained from your dealer, at www.helminc.com, or from:
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:
Helm, Incorporated Attention: Customer Service 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, MI 48170 USA

Using this Manual
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found.
Danger, Warning, and Caution
Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them.
{ Danger
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death.
{ Warning
Warning indicates a hazard that could result in injury or death.

©2019 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.

Caution Caution indicates a hazard that could result in property or vehicle damage.
A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means "Do not," "Do not do this," or "Do not let this happen."
Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gauge, or indicator.

M : Shown when the owner's manual
has additional instructions or information.
* : Shown when the service manual
has additional instructions or information.
0 : Shown when there is more
information on another page -- "see page."
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. See the features in this manual for information.
u : Air Conditioning System
G : Air Conditioning Refrigerant Oil
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
$ : Brake System Warning Light
9 : Dispose of Used Components
Properly
P : Do Not Apply High Pressure
Water

INTRODUCTION 3
B : Engine Coolant Temperature _ : Flame/Fire Prohibited H : Flammable [ : Forward Collision Alert R : Fuse Block Cover Lock Location + : Fuses j : ISOFIX/LATCH System Child
Restraints
Q : Keep Fuse Block Covers Properly
Installed
| : Lane Change Alert @ : Lane Departure Warning A : Lane Keep Assist * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp : : Oil Pressure X : Park Assist ~ : Pedestrian Ahead Indicator O : Power 7 : Rear Cross Traffic Alert

4 INTRODUCTION
I : Registered Technician S : Remote Vehicle Start > : Seat Belt Reminders I : Side Blind Zone Alert h : Stop/Start 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak/
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
a : Under Pressure V : Vehicle Ahead Indicator

Instrument Panel Overview

INTRODUCTION 5

6 INTRODUCTION
1. Air Vents 0 139.
2. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 125.
Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and Lane-Change Signals 0 129.
3. Tap Shift Controls (If Equipped). See Manual Mode (Electronic Shifter) 0 177 or Manual Mode (Mechanical Shifter) 0 176.
4. Cruise Control 0 192.
Adaptive Cruise Control 0 194 (If Equipped).
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 210 (If Equipped).
Heated Steering Wheel 0 86 (If Equipped).
5. Instrument Cluster 0 93.
Driver Information Center (DIC) Display. See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 109.
6. Steering Wheel Controls 0 86 (If Equipped). See infotainment manual.
7. Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 86.
8. Infotainment 0 133.

9. Light Sensor. See Automatic Headlamp System 0 128.
10. Hazard Warning Flashers 0 128.
11. Dual Automatic Climate Control System 0 134.
12. Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 40 (If Equipped).
13. Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 219 (If Equipped).
14. Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 182.
Stop/Start Disable Switch. See Stop/Start System 0 161.
Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH) 0 181.
MODE Button or « /ª Button
(V-Series Only). See Driver Mode Control 0 184.
15. Wireless Charging Pad (If Equipped) (Out of View). See Wireless Charging 0 89.
16. Park Assist Button. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 204.

17. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission (Mechanical Shifter) 0 169 or Automatic Transmission (Electronic shifter) 0 171.
18. ENGINE START/STOP Button. See Ignition Positions 0 158.
19. Horn 0 86.
20. Steering Wheel Adjustment 0 86.
21. Head-Up Display (HUD) 0 111 (If Equipped).
22. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out of View). See Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light) 0 100.
23. Instrument Panel Illumination Control 0 129.
24. Hood Release (Out of View). See Hood 0 236.
25. Electric Parking Brake 0 179 (If Equipped).

Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys and Locks Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Doors Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Vehicle Security Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Exterior Mirrors Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 7

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . 27 Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Keys and Locks
Keys

Interior Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 28 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . 28 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Windows Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Roof Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

{ Warning
Leaving children in a vehicle with a remote key is dangerous and children or others could be seriously injured or killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the remote key in the vehicle, and children or others could be caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave children in a vehicle with a remote key.

8 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS
To remove the mechanical key, press the button on the side of the remote key near the bottom, and pull the mechanical key out. Never pull the mechanical key out without pressing the button.
If it becomes difficult to turn the key, inspect the key blade for debris. Periodically clean with a brush or pick.
See your dealer if a new mechanical key is needed.
Contact Roadside Service if locked out of the vehicle. See Roadside Service 0 325.
With an active OnStar or connected service plan, an OnStar Advisor may remotely unlock the vehicle. See OnStar Overview 0 336.

The mechanical key, inside the remote key, is used for the driver door and glove box.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 331.
If there is a decrease in the remote key operating range:

. Check the distance. The remote key may be too far from the vehicle.
. Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.
. Check the remote key battery. See "Battery Replacement" later in this section.
. If the remote key is still not working correctly, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
The Keyless Access system allows for vehicle entry when the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft). See "Keyless Access Operation" later in this section.
The remote key functions may work up to 60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.
Other conditions can impact the performance of the remote key. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System 0 8.

Q : Press to lock all doors and the fuel
door, if equipped. The turn signal indicators may flash and/or the horn may sound on the second press to indicate locking. See Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
Pressing Q may also arm the alarm
system. See Vehicle Alarm System 0 22.
If equipped with remote folding
mirrors, pressing Q on the remote key
may fold the mirrors. See Folding Mirrors 0 26.
K : Press to unlock the driver door
and the fuel door, if equipped. Press again within five seconds to unlock all

KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 9

doors. The remote key can be programmed to unlock all doors on the first button press. See Vehicle Personalization 0 116. When remotely unlocking the vehicle at night, the headlamps and back-up lamps may come on for about 30 seconds to light your approach to the vehicle. The turn signal indicators may flash to indicate unlocking.
Pressing K will disarm the alarm
system. See Vehicle Alarm System 0 22.
Press and hold K for about
three seconds to remotely open the windows, if enabled. See Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
If equipped with remote folding
mirror, pressing K on the remote key
may unfold the mirrors. See Folding Mirrors 0 26.
S : Press S twice to start the engine
from outside the vehicle using the remote key. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 14.
7 : Press and release one time to
initiate vehicle locator. The exterior lamps flash and the horn chirps three

times. Press and hold 7 for more than
three seconds to sound the panic alarm. The horn sounds and the turn signal lamps flash for 30 seconds,
or until 7 is pressed again or the
vehicle is started.
X : Press twice to release the trunk.
Keyless Access Operation
The Keyless Access system lets you lock and unlock the doors and access the trunk without removing the remote key from your pocket, purse, briefcase, etc. The remote key must be within 1 m (3 ft) of the trunk or door being opened. The button is on the outside door handle.
The Keyless Access system can be programmed to be turned off or to unlock all doors on the first door handle press from the driver door. Keyless unlocking can also be turned off. See Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
If equipped with memory seats, remote keys 1 and 2 are linked to seating positions of memory 1 or 2. See Memory Seats 0 37.

10 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS

Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the Driver Door

When the doors are locked and the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft) of the door handle, pressing the door handle button on the driver door handle will unlock the driver door. If the door handle button is pressed again within five seconds, all passenger doors will unlock.

If equipped with remote folding mirror, pressing the driver door handle button may fold and unfold the mirrors. See Folding Mirrors 0 26.

Driver Door Shown, Passenger Similar
Pressing the door handle button will cause all doors to lock if any of the following occur:
. It has been more than five seconds since the first door handle button press.
. Two door handle button presses were used to unlock all doors.
. Any vehicle door has opened and all doors are now closed.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the Passenger Doors
When the doors are locked and the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft) of the door handle, pressing the door handle button on a passenger door handle will unlock all doors. Pressing the door handle button will cause all doors to lock if any of the following occur:
. The door handle button was used to unlock all doors.
. Any vehicle door has opened and all doors are now closed.
Disable/Enable Keyless Unlocking of Exterior Door Handles and Trunk
If equipped, keyless unlocking of the exterior door handles and trunk can be disabled and enabled.
Disabling Keyless Unlocking:
With the vehicle off, press and hold Q and K on the remote key at the same
time for approximately four seconds. The turn signal lamps will flash four times quickly to indicate access is disabled. Using any exterior handle to unlock the doors or open the trunk

will cause the turn signal lamps to flash four times quickly, indicating access is disabled. If disabled, disarm the alarm system before starting the vehicle.
Disabling Keyless Unlocking may also be configured under Vehicle Personalization. See Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
Enabling Keyless Unlocking:
With the vehicle off, press and hold Q and K on the remote key at the same
time for approximately four seconds. The turn signal lamps will flash twice quickly to indicate access is enabled.
Enabling Keyless Unlocking may also be configured under Vehicle Personalization. See Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
Passive (Walkaway) Locking
The Keyless Access system will lock the vehicle several seconds after all doors are closed if the vehicle is off and at least one remote key has been removed or none remain in the vehicle.

KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 11

If equipped, the fuel door will also lock.
If other electronic devices interfere with the remote key signal, the vehicle may not detect the remote key inside the vehicle. If passive (walkaway) locking is enabled, the doors may lock with the remote key inside the vehicle. Do not leave the remote key in an unattended vehicle.
To customize the doors to automatically lock when exiting the vehicle, see Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
If equipped with remote folding mirror, passive (walkaway) locking may fold the mirrors. See Folding Mirrors 0 26.
Temporary Disable of Passive (Walkaway) Locking
Temporarily disable passive locking by
pressing and holding K on the
interior door switch with a door open for at least four seconds, or until three chimes are heard. Passive (walkaway) locking will then remain disabled until the vehicle is turned on.

Remote Key Left In Vehicle Alert
When the vehicle is turned off and a remote key is left in the vehicle, the horn will chirp three times after all doors are closed. To turn on or off see Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
Remote Key No Longer In Vehicle Alert
If the vehicle is on, with a door open, and then all doors are closed, the vehicle will check for a remote key inside. If a remote key is not detected, the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display NO KEY FOUND and the horn will chirp three times.
This occurs only once each time the vehicle is driven. See Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
Keyless Trunk Opening
Press the touch pad on the rear of the trunk above the license plate if the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft).
Mechanical Key Access
To access a vehicle with a weak remote key battery, see Door Locks 0 16.

12 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS

Programming Remote Keys to the Vehicle

Only remote keys programmed to the vehicle will work. If a remote key is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer. The vehicle can be reprogrammed so that lost or stolen remote keys no longer work. Each vehicle can have up to eight remote keys matched to it.

Programming with Recognized Remote Keys
A new key can be programmed to the vehicle when there are two recognized keys.
To program, the vehicle must be in RUN and both the recognized and new remote keys must be with you.
1. Place the two recognized remote keys on the passenger seat.
2. Scroll to the DIC menu to "Remote Key Relearn" and select.
The DIC displays READY FOR REMOTE #3, 4, 5, etc.

3. Place the new remote key into the rear cupholder.
4. Press ENGINE START/STOP. When the remote key is learned the DIC display will show that it is ready to program the next remote key.
5. Remove the remote key from the
rear cupholder and press K or Q
on the remote key.
To program additional remote keys, repeat Steps 4­5.

When all additional remote keys are programmed, press and hold ENGINE START/STOP for approximately 12 seconds to exit programming mode.
Programming without Recognized Remote Keys
If two currently recognized remote keys are not available, see your dealer to program new remote keys.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low Remote Key Battery
For improved vehicle security, the remote key is equipped with a motion sensor. When starting the vehicle, if the remote key has been idle for a while, the DIC may display KEY IN SLEEP MODE, MOVE KEY, THEN START. Move the remote key slightly and try starting the vehicle. When starting the vehicle, if the remote key battery is depleted or there is signal interference, the DIC may display NO KEY FOUND, REPLACE BATTERY IN KEY or NO REMOTE KEY WAS DETECTED PLACE KEY IN KEY

POCKET THEN START YOUR VEHICLE, follow the steps shown below:
1. Place the remote key into the rear cupholder.
2. With the vehicle in P (Park) or N (Neutral) press the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP. Replace the remote key battery as soon as possible.

KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 13

Battery Replacement

Caution

{ Warning
Never allow children to play with the remote key. The remote key contains a small battery, which can be a choking hazard. If swallowed, internal burns can occur, resulting in severe injury or death. Seek medical attention immediately if a battery is swallowed.
{ Warning
To avoid personal injury, do not touch metal surfaces on the remote key when it has been exposed to extreme heat. These surfaces can be hot to the touch at temperatures above 59 °C (138 °F).

When replacing the battery, do not touch any of the circuitry on the remote key. Static from your body could damage the remote key.
Caution
Always replace the battery with the correct type. Replacing the battery with an incorrect type could potentially create a risk of battery explosion. Dispose of used batteries according to instructions and local laws. Do not attempt to burn, crush, or cut the used battery, and avoid exposing the battery to environments with extremely low air pressures or high temperatures.

Replace the battery if the DIC displays REPLACE BATTERY IN KEY.

14 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS

1. Press the button on the side of the remote key near the bottom and pull the mechanical key out. Never pull the mechanical key out without pressing the button.

2. Use the mechanical key blade in the slot to remove the battery cover by hand.

3. Remove the seal by pulling on the tab to access the battery.
4. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
5. Insert the new battery, negative side facing down. Replace with a CR2450 or equivalent battery.
6. Replace the seal, pushing it into the groove around the battery compartment.
7. Replace the battery cover by snapping it back into the remote key.
8. Reinsert the mechanical key.
Remote Vehicle Start
This feature allows the engine to be started from outside the vehicle.
S : This button on the remote key is
for remote start.
The climate control system will use the previous settings during a remote start. The rear window defogger may come on during remote start based on

cold ambient conditions. The rear defog indicator light does not come on during remote start.
If equipped, the heated and ventilated front seats may also come on when the vehicle personalization setting is enabled. See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 40.
If equipped with a remote start heated steering wheel, it may come on during a remote start. See Heated Steering Wheel 0 86.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws may require a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any requirements.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not use the remote start feature. The vehicle may run out of fuel.
The remote key range may be shorter while the vehicle is running.
Other conditions can affect the performance of the remote key. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System 0 8.

KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 15

You are allowed multiple starts totaling 30 minutes of engine run time. The maximum run time of a single start is 15 minutes, and it will shut off automatically. You could do three 10 minute starts if you manually shut off after 10 minutes. The last 10 minute start would shut off automatically as your total 30 minutes will have been used.
Starting the Engine Using Remote Start
1. Press S twice on the remote
key. The turn signal lamps will flash. The lamps flash to confirm the request to remote start the vehicle has been received. During the remote start, the doors will be locked and the parking lamps will remain on as long as the engine is running.
2. The engine will shut off after 15 minutes or after the remainder of the 30 minute total running time is used, unless you stop the remote start before engine running has completed or the vehicle is turned on.

3. After entering the vehicle during a remote start, press the brake and ENGINE START/STOP with the remote key in the vehicle to drive the vehicle.
Additional Engine Run Time
Remote start can be used for up to 30 minutes of total engine run time.
After two remote starts of 15 minutes, or multiple shorter time starts totaling 30 minutes have been used, the vehicle must be started normally before the remote start can be used again.
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start, do any of the following:
. Press S. The parking lamps will
turn off.
. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
. Turn the vehicle on and then back off.

16 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS

Conditions in Which Remote Start Will Not Work

Warning (Continued)

The remote start will not operate if any of the following occur: . The ignition is in any mode other
than off. . A remote key is in the vehicle. . The hood is not closed. . The hazard warning flashers
are on. . There is an emission control
system malfunction. . The engine coolant temperature is
too high. . The oil pressure is low. . The 30 minutes of engine run time
have been used. . The vehicle is not in P (Park).
Door Locks
{ Warning
Unlocked doors can be dangerous. (Continued)

. Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. The doors can be unlocked and opened while the vehicle is moving. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked. So, all passengers should wear seat belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
. Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it.
. Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
the vehicle. Locking the doors can help prevent this from happening.
To lock or unlock the doors from outside the vehicle:
. Press Q or K on the remote key.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8.
. Use the mechanical key in the driver door. The key lock cylinder is covered with a cap.
See "Driver Door Key Lock Cylinder Access (In Case of Dead Battery)" later in this section.
To lock or unlock the doors from inside the vehicle:
. Press Q or K on the power door
lock switch.
. Pull once on the door handle to unlock the door and again to open the door.

Keyless Access

KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 17

Driver Door Key Lock Cylinder Access (In Case of Dead Battery)

4. Use the mechanical key in the cylinder.

To replace the cap:

1. Pull the door handle (1) to the open position and hold it open until the cap installation is complete.

When the doors are locked and the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft) of the driver door handle, press the lock/ unlock button. When unlocking from the driver door, the first press unlocks that door; press again within five seconds to unlock the passenger door and the trunk. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8.

To access the driver door key lock cylinder:
1. Pull the door handle (1) to the open position and hold it open until the cap removal is complete.
2. Insert the mechanical key into the slot (3) on the bottom of the cap (2) and lift the mechanical key upward.
3. Move the cap (2) rearward and remove.

2. Insert the two tabs (6) at the back of the cap between the seal (5) and the metal base (4).

18 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS
5. Check that the cap is secure. Free-Turning Locks The door key lock cylinder turns freely when either the wrong mechanical key is used, or the correct mechanical key is not fully inserted. The free-turning door lock feature prevents the lock from being forced open. To reset the lock, turn it to the vertical position with the correct mechanical key fully inserted. Remove the mechanical key and insert it again. If this does not reset the lock, turn the mechanical key halfway around in the cylinder and repeat the reset procedure.
3. Slide the cap forward and press the forward edge to install the cap in place.
4. Release the door handle.

Power Door Locks
Q : Press to lock the doors. The
indicator light in the switch will illuminate when locked.
K : Press to unlock the doors. Delayed Locking
This feature delays the actual locking of the doors until five seconds after all doors are closed.

When Q is pressed on the power door
lock switch with the door open, a chime will sound three times indicating that delayed locking is active.
The doors will then lock automatically five seconds after all doors are closed. If a door is reopened before five seconds have elapsed, the five-second timer will reset once all the doors are closed again.
Press Q on the door lock switch again, or press Q on the key, to override this
feature and lock the doors immediately.
Delayed locking can be programmed. See Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically when all doors are closed, the ignition is on, and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 19

If a vehicle door is unlocked, and then opened and closed, the doors will lock either when your foot is removed from the brake or the vehicle speed becomes faster than 13 km/h (8 mph).
To unlock the doors:
. Press K on the power door lock
switch.
. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

inside has not reduced, the driver door will unlock and the horn will chirp three times.
Lockout Protection can be manually overridden with the driver door open
by pressing and holding Q on the
power door lock switch.
Safety Locks

Automatic door locking cannot be disabled. Automatic door unlocking can be programmed. See Vehicle Personalization 0 116.

Lockout Protection
If the vehicle is on or in ACC/ ACCESSORY and the power door lock switch is pressed with the driver door open, all the doors will lock and only the driver door will unlock.
If the vehicle is off and locking is requested while a door is open, when all doors are closed the vehicle will check for keys inside. If any remote key programmed to the vehicle is detected and the number of keys

With Folding Mirrors

20 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS
remain locked and the indicator light may flash. Release the handle, then press the safety lock twice to deactivate the safety locks.
Without Folding Mirrors The rear door safety locks prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
Press { v to activate the safety locks
on the rear doors. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate when activated. The rear door power windows are also disabled. See Power Windows 0 29.
Press { v again to deactivate the
safety locks. If an inside rear door handle is being pulled at the same time the safety lock is deactivated, only that door will

Doors
Trunk
{ Warning
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven with the liftgate or trunk/hatch open, or with any objects that pass through the seal between the body and the trunk/ hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:
. Close all of the windows.
. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.
. Adjust the climate control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
set the fan speed to the highest setting. See "Climate Control Systems" in the Index. . If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate, disable the power liftgate function.
See Engine Exhaust 0 168.
Manual Trunk
To release the trunk, the vehicle must be off or the shift lever must be in P (Park).

KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 21
. Press | on the driver door. . Press X twice quickly on the
remote key.

. Press the touch pad on the rear of the trunk above the license plate when all doors are unlocked.
The trunk can be opened while the vehicle is locked by pressing the touch pad above the license plate while the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft) of the rear of the vehicle. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8.

Close the trunk by pulling on the handle. Do not use the handle as a tie-down. Do not press the touch pad while closing the trunk; this will cause the trunk lid to be unlatched.
The trunk has an electric latch. If the vehicle has lost power or the battery is disconnected, the trunk will not open. If this happens, use the emergency trunk release handle.

22 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

exposure to light. Pull the release handle to open the trunk from the inside.

Caution

Do not use the emergency trunk release handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.

Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features; however, they do not make the vehicle impossible to steal.
Vehicle Alarm System
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm system.

After pulling the emergency trunk release handle, push the handle back into the bezel.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release handle on the trunk lid. This handle will glow following

The indicator light, on the instrument panel near the windshield, indicates the status of the system.
Off : Alarm system is disarmed.
On Solid : Vehicle is secured during the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured. A door, the hood, or the trunk is open.
Slow Flash : Alarm system is armed.
Arming the Alarm System
1. Turn off the vehicle.
2. Lock the vehicle in one of three ways:
. Use the remote key.
. Use the Keyless Access system.
. With a door open, press Q on
the interior of the door.
3. After 30 seconds the alarm system will arm, and the indicator light will begin to slowly flash indicating the alarm
system is operating. Pressing Q
on the remote key a second time will bypass the 30-second delay and immediately arm the alarm system.
The vehicle alarm system will not arm if the doors are locked with the mechanical key.

KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 23

If the driver door is opened without first unlocking with the remote key, the horn will chirp and the lights will flash to indicate pre-alarm. If the vehicle is not started, or the door is
not unlocked by pressing K on the
remote key during the 10-second pre-alarm, the alarm will be activated.
The alarm will also be activated if a passenger door, the trunk, or the hood is opened without first disarming the system. When the alarm is activated, the turn signals flash and the horn sounds for about 30 seconds. The alarm system will then re-arm to monitor the next unauthorized event.
Disarming the Alarm System
To disarm the alarm system or turn off the alarm if it has been activated:
. Press K on the remote key.
. Unlock the vehicle using the Keyless Access system.
. Start the vehicle.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:

. Lock the vehicle after all occupants have left the vehicle and all doors are closed.
. Always unlock a door with the remote key or use the Keyless Access system.
Unlatching the driver door with the mechanical key will not disarm the system or turn off the alarm.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If K is pressed on the remote key and
the horn chirps and the lights flash three times, a previous alarm occurred while the system was armed.
If the alarm has been activated, a message will appear on the DIC.
Power Sounder, Inclination Sensor, and Intrusion Sensor
In addition to the standard theft-deterrent system features, this system may also have a power sounder, inclination sensor, and intrusion sensor.

24 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS

The power sounder provides an audible alarm which is distinct from the vehicle's horn. It has its own power source, and can sound an alarm if the vehicle's battery is compromised.

. Make sure there are no obstructions blocking the sensors in the front overhead console.
Inclination and Intrusion Sensor Disable Switch

The inclination sensor can set off the alarm if it senses movement of the vehicle, such as when a tire is removed. Make sure the vehicle's alarm is not armed prior to any jacking.

The intrusion sensor monitors the vehicle interior, and can activate the alarm if it senses unauthorized entry into the vehicle's interior. Do not allow passengers or pets to remain in the vehicle when the intrusion sensor is activated.
Before arming the theft-deterrent system and activating the intrusion sensor:
. Make sure all doors and windows are completely closed.
. Secure any loose items such as sun glasses.

It is recommended that the intrusion and inclination sensor be deactivated if pets are left in the vehicle or the vehicle is being transported. With the
vehicle turned off, press o in the
front overhead console. The indicator light will come on momentarily, indicating that these sensors have been disabled for the next alarm system arming cycle.

Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 331.
Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system. The system does not have to be manually armed or disarmed. The vehicle is automatically immobilized when the vehicle is turned off. The immobilization system is disarmed when the ignition is turned on or to ACC/ACCESSORY and a valid remote key is present in the vehicle.
The security light, in the instrument cluster, comes on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.

The system has one or more remote keys matched to an immobilizer control unit in the vehicle. Only a correctly matched remote key will start the vehicle. If the remote key is ever damaged, you may not be able to start your vehicle.
When trying to start the vehicle, the security light may come on briefly.
If the engine does not start and the security light stays on, there is a problem with the system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the vehicle will not change ignition modes (ACC/ACCESSORY, on, off), and the remote key appears to be undamaged, try another remote key. Or, you may try placing the remote key in the backup location. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8.
If the ignition modes will not change with the other remote key or in the backup location, the vehicle needs service. If the ignition does change modes, the first remote key may be faulty. See your dealer.

KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 25

It is possible for the immobilizer system to learn new or replacement remote keys. Up to eight remote keys can be programmed for the vehicle. To program additional remote keys, see "Programming Remote Keys to the Vehicle" under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8.
Do not leave the remote key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
{ Warning
A convex mirror can make things, like other vehicles, look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat.

26 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS

Power Mirrors

Memory Mirrors
The vehicle may have memory mirrors. See Memory Seats 0 37.

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)

The vehicle may have SBZA. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) 0 217.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)

The vehicle may have LCA. See Lane Change Alert (LCA) 0 217.

To adjust each mirror:
1. Press j or | to select the driver
or passenger side mirror. The indicator light will illuminate.
2. Press the arrows on the control pad to move the mirror in the desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
4. Press j or | again to deselect
the mirror.

Folding Mirrors
Manual Folding Mirrors
The mirrors can be folded inward toward the vehicle to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. Push the mirror outward to return it to the original position.

Power Folding Mirrors
If equipped, press g to power fold the mirrors. Press g again to unfold.
The outside mirrors may automatically unfold when the vehicle is driven above 20 km/h (12 mph), but may be folded with the power folding mirror switch. If the vehicle speed is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph), they may automatically unfold and may not be refolded with the power folding mirror switch.

Resetting the Power Folding Mirrors
Reset the power folding mirrors if:
. The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding.
. They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
. The mirrors do not stay in the unfolded position.
. The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds.
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror controls to reset them to their normal position. A noise may be heard during the resetting of the power folding mirrors. This sound is normal after a manual folding operation.
Remote Mirror Folding
If equipped with power folding mirrors, and the mirrors have been folded with the power folding mirror switch, they may not be automatically unfolded by the Remote Mirror Folding feature.

KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 27

If equipped with power folding mirrors, and the mirrors have not been folded with the power folding mirror switch and the vehicle is in P (Park), they may be automatically folded/unfolded as follows:
1. If doors are locked by pressing H
on the remote key, the mirrors will fold. If doors are unlocked by
pressing I on the remote key,
the mirrors will unfold. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8.
2. If doors are locked by pressing the door handle lock/unlock button, the mirrors will fold. If doors are unlocked by pressing the door handle button, the mirrors will unfold. See "Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the Driver Door" in Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8.
3. If passive locking is enabled and doors are locked by that feature, the mirrors will fold. See "Passive Locking" in Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8.

Heated Mirrors
K : The rear window defogger also
heats the outside mirrors.
See Dual Automatic Climate Control System 0 134.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
If the vehicle has the automatic dimming mirror, the driver outside mirror automatically adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind you.
Reverse Tilt Mirrors
If equipped with memory seats, the passenger and/or driver mirror tilts to a preselected position when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This allows the curb to be seen when parallel parking. The mirror(s) return to the original position when:
. The vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse), or remains in R (Reverse) for about 30 seconds.
. The ignition is turned off.
. The vehicle is driven in R (Reverse) above a set speed.

28 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS

Turn this feature on or off through vehicle personalization. See Vehicle Personalization 0 116.

Interior Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirrors

Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear view of the area behind the vehicle.

Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a soft towel dampened with water.

Manual Rearview Mirror
If equipped, push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it rearward for nighttime use to avoid glare of the headlamps from behind.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
If equipped, automatic dimming reduces the glare of the headlamps from behind. This feature comes on when the vehicle is started.

Windows
{ Warning
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics are designed to improve fuel economy performance. This may result in a

pulsing sound when either rear window is down and the front windows are up. To reduce the sound, open either a front window or the sunroof, if equipped.
Power Windows
{ Warning
Children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Never leave the remote key in a vehicle with children. When there are children in the rear seat, use the window lockout switch to prevent operation of the windows. See Keys 0 7.

KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 29 Window Lockout

Power windows work when the ignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 163.
Using the window switch, press to open or pull to close the window.
The windows may be temporarily disabled if they are used repeatedly within a short time.

With Folding Mirrors, Without Folding Mirrors Similar
This feature stops the rear passenger window switches from working.
. Press { 2 to engage the rear
window lockout feature. The indicator light is on when engaged.
The rear door safety locks will also engage.
. Press { 2 again to disengage.
The rear door safety locks will also disengage.

30 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS

Window Express Movement
All windows can be opened without holding the window switch. Press the switch down fully and quickly release to express open the window.
If equipped, pull the window switch up fully and quickly release to express close the window. Briefly press or pull the window switch in the same direction to stop that window's express movement.
Window Automatic Reversal System
The express-close feature will reverse window movement if it comes in contact with an object. Extreme cold or ice could cause the window to auto-reverse. The window will operate normally after the object or condition is removed.

Automatic Reversal System Override
{ Warning
If automatic reversal system override is active, the window will not reverse automatically. You or others could be injured and the window could be damaged. Before using automatic reversal system override, make sure that all people and obstructions are clear of the window path.
When the engine is on, override the automatic reversal system by pulling and holding the window switch if conditions prevent it from closing.
Programming the Power Windows

Programming may be necessary if the vehicle battery has been disconnected or discharged. If the window is unable to express-up, program each express-close window:

1. Close all doors.

2. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ ACCESSORY.
3. Partially open the window to be programmed. Then close it and continue to pull the switch briefly after the window has fully closed.
4. Open the window and continue to press the switch briefly after the window has fully opened.
Remote Window Operation
If equipped, this feature allows all the windows to be opened remotely. If enabled in vehicle personalization,
press and hold K on the remote key
for about three seconds. See Vehicle Personalization 0 116.

Sun Visors
Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the center mount to pivot to the side window and, if equipped, extend along the rod.

KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 31

Roof
Sunroof

1. SLIDE Switch 2. TILT Switch
Sunroof Operation:

If equipped, the ignition must be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active to operate the sunroof. See Ignition Positions 0 158 and Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 163.
While operating in express, movement can be stopped by pressing the switch again.
The sunroof cannot be opened or closed if the vehicle has an electrical failure.

. Press and release D (1) to
express-open to the fully open position.
. Pull and release D (1) to
express-close.
. Press or pull and hold D (1) to
open or close without express.
Release D (1) at the desired
position.
Sunroof Vent Operation:
. Press and release E (2) to vent
the sunroof.
. Pull and release E (2) to close the
sunroof vent.

This sunroof also has a sunshade, which must be opened and closed manually.

32 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS

Automatic Reversal System

The sunroof, if equipped, has an automatic reversal system that is only active when the sunroof is operated in express-close mode.

If an object is in the path while express-closing, the reversal system will detect an object, stop, and open the sunroof slightly.

If this condition occurs, attempt to remove the object, then pull and release the switch to express close. If the reversal occurs multiple times, the DIC message OPEN THEN CLOSE SUNROOF will display, and express is disabled. To operate sunroof while express is disabled, the switch must be either pressed or pulled and held.

Dirt and debris may collect on the sunroof seal or in the track. This could cause an issue with sunroof operation or noise. It could also plug the water drainage system. Periodically open the sunroof and remove any obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealing area using a clean cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not remove grease from the sunroof.

Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Front Seats Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . . . 36 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Heated and Ventilated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Rear Seats Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Seat Belts Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 How to Wear Seat Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Seat Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Seat Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Airbag System Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . 53 When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . 55 How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . 55 What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . 57 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . 61 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Child Restraints Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Infants and Young Children . . . . . . 65 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . 69 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) . . . . . . . 70 Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 33
Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

34 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
Head Restraints
{ Warning
With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly.

top of the occupant's head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Front Seats
If equipped, the vehicle's front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions.

the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The front seat outboard head restraints are not removable.
Rear Seats
The vehicle's rear seat has adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions.
The height of the head restraint can be adjusted. Pull the head restraint up to raise it. Try to move the head restraint to make sure that it is locked in place.

If equipped with base seats, adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the

The height of the head restraint can be adjusted.
To raise or lower the head restraint, press the button located on the side of the head restraint, and pull up or push the head restraint down and release the button. Pull and push on

To lower the head restraint, press the button, located on the top of the seatback, and push the head restraint down. Try to move the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place.
Rear outboard head restraints are not removable.
The rear seat outboard head restraints are not intended to be removed. If removal is required see your dealer for assistance with removal.

Front Seats
Power Seat Adjustment
{ Warning
The power seats will work with the ignition off. Children could operate the power seats and be injured. Never leave children alone in the vehicle.

High Performance Seat Shown, Others Similar

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 35
To adjust the seat:
. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward.
. Raise or lower the seat by moving the rear of the control up or down.
. If equipped, raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down.
For vehicles not equipped with front cushion tilt, the front part of the control will raise and lower the seat.
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), seat travel may be limited. Release and press the seat switch again to continue movement.
If something has blocked the seat during movement, the movement may stop. Remove the obstruction and try the adjustment again. If movement is still not available, see your dealer.
To adjust the seatback, see Reclining Seatbacks 0 36.
To adjust the lumbar support, see Lumbar Adjustment 0 36.

36 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
Some vehicles are equipped with a Safety Alert Seat. This feature activates a vibrating pulse alert in the driver seat to help the driver avoid crashes.
Lumbar Adjustment

. Press Rearward (2) to move lumbar support rearward.
Bolster Adjustment To adjust bolster support, if equipped:

Thigh Support Adjustment

1. To adjust lumbar support, if equipped:
. Press Up (1) to move lumbar support upward.
. Press Forward (4) to move lumbar support forward.
. Press Down (3) to move lumbar support down.

1. Press the center control up to increase bolster support.
2. Press the center control down to decrease bolster support.

If equipped, pull up on the lever. Then pull or push on the support to lengthen or shorten. Release the lever to lock in place.
Reclining Seatbacks
{ Warning
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the seat belts cannot do their job.
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
The shoulder belt will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear the seat belt properly.

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 37
. Tilt the top of the control rearward to recline.
. Tilt the top of the control forward to raise.
Memory Seats

Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving.

To adjust the seatback:

If equipped, memory seats allow two drivers to save and recall their unique seat positions for driving the vehicle, and a shared exit position for getting out of the vehicle. Other feature positions may also be saved, such as power mirrors and power steering wheel, if equipped. Memory positions are linked to remote key 1 or 2 for automatic memory recalls.

38 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
Before saving, adjust all available memory feature positions. Turn the vehicle on and then press and release SET; a beep will sound. Then immediately press and hold 1, 2,
or B (Exit) until two beeps sound. To
manually recall these positions, press
and hold 1, 2, or B until the saved
position is reached. Follow the instructions under "Saving Memory Positions."
The vehicle identifies the current driver's remote key number (1­8). See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8. Only remote keys 1 and 2 can be used for automatic memory recalls. A Driver Information Center (DIC) welcome message indicating the remote key number may display for the first few ignition cycles following a remote key change. For Seat Entry Memory to work properly, save the positions to the memory button (1 or 2) matching the remote key number displayed in the DIC welcome message. Carry the linked remote key when entering the vehicle.

Vehicle Personalization Settings
. To have the Seat Entry Memory movement begin when the vehicle is started, select the Settings menu, then Vehicle, then Seating Position, and then Seat Entry Memory. Select On or Off. See "Seat Entry Memory" later in this section.
. To begin Seat Exit Memory movement when the vehicle is turned off and the driver door is opened, or when the vehicle is turned off with the driver door already opened, select the Settings menu, then Vehicle, then Seating Position, and then Seat Exit Memory. Select On or Off. See "Seat Exit Memory" later in this section.
. See Vehicle Personalization 0 116 for additional setting information.
Identifying Driver Number
To identify the driver number:
1. Move your remote key away from the vehicle.

2. Start the vehicle with another remote key. The DIC should display the driver number for the other remote key. Turn the vehicle off and remove the remote key from the vehicle.
3. Start the vehicle with the initial remote key. The DIC should display the driver number of your remote key.
Saving Memory Positions
Read these instructions completely before saving memory positions.
To save preferred driving positions 1 and 2:
1. Turn the vehicle on or to ACC/ ACCESSORY with remote key 1 or 2.
A DIC welcome message may indicate driver number 1 or 2.
2. Adjust all available memory features to the desired driving position.
3. Press and release SET; a beep will sound.

4. Immediately press and hold the 1 or 2 memory button matching the above DIC welcome message until two beeps sound.
If too much time passes between releasing SET and pressing 1, the memory position will not be saved and two beeps will not sound. Repeat Steps 3 and 4.
1 or 2 corresponds to the driver number. See "Identifying Driver Number" previously in this section.
5. Repeat Steps 1­4 for a second driver using 1 or 2.
To save the position for B and Seat
Exit Memory features, repeat Steps 1­
4 using B. This saves the position for
getting out of the vehicle.
Save preferred memory feature positions to both 1 and 2 if you are the only driver.

Manually Recalling Memory Positions
Press and hold 1, 2, or B to recall the
previously saved memory positions if you are driver 1 or 2 identified in the DIC welcome message.
To stop Manual Memory recall
movement, release 1, 2, or B or press
any of the following controls:
. Power seat
. Memory SET
. Power mirror, with the driver or passenger side mirror selected
. Power steering wheel, if equipped
Manual Memory recall movement for
1, 2, or B buttons may be initiated
and may complete to the saved memory position if the vehicle is in or out of P (Park).
Seat Entry Memory
The vehicle identifies the number of the current driver's remote key (1­8). See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8. If the remote key is 1 or 2, and Seat Entry Memory is enabled in vehicle personalization, the

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 39
positions saved to the same memory button number 1 or 2 are automatically recalled when the vehicle is turned on. Remote keys 3­8 will not provide automatic memory recalls.
To turn Seat Entry Memory on or off, see "Vehicle Personalization Settings" previously in this section and Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
The shift lever must be in P (Park) to start Seat Entry Memory. Seat Entry Memory recall will complete if the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) prior to reaching the saved memory position.
To stop Seat Entry Memory recall movement, turn the vehicle off or press any of the following controls:
. Power seat
. Memory SET, 1, 2, or B
. Power mirror, with the driver or passenger side mirror selected
. Power steering wheel, if equipped
If the saved memory seat position does not automatically recall or recalls to the wrong positions, the driver's

40 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
remote key number (1 or 2) may not match the memory button number that positions were saved to. Try storing the position to the other memory button or try the other remote key.
Seat Exit Memory
Seat Exit Memory is not linked to a
remote key. The position saved to B
is used for all drivers. To turn Seat Exit Memory on or off, see "Vehicle Personalization Settings" previously in this section and Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
If turned on, the position saved to B
is automatically recalled when one of the following occurs:
. The vehicle is turned off and the driver door is opened within a short time.
. The vehicle is turned off with the driver door open.
To stop Seat Exit Memory movement, press any of the following memory controls:
. Power seat

. Memory SET, 1, 2, or B
. Power mirror, with the driver or passenger side mirror selected
. Power steering wheel, if equipped
Obstructions
If something has blocked the driver seat while recalling a memory position, the recall may stop. Remove the obstruction and try the recall again. If the memory position still does not recall, see your dealer.
Heated and Ventilated Front Seats
{ Warning
If temperature change or pain to the skin cannot be felt, the seat heater may cause burns. To reduce the risk of burns, use care when using the seat heater, especially for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket,
(Continued)

Warning (Continued) cushion, cover, or similar item. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat heater may cause a burn or may damage the seat.
If equipped, the buttons are near the climate controls on the center stack. To operate, the engine must be on.
Press J or z to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and seatback.

Press C or { to ventilate the driver
or passenger seat.
Press the button once for the highest setting. With each press of the button, the seat will change to the next lower setting, and then to the off setting. The indicator lights next to the buttons indicate three for the highest setting and one for the lowest. If the front heated seats are on high, the level may automatically be lowered after approximately 30 minutes.
When this feature is off, the heated and ventilated seat symbols on the buttons are white. A ventilated seat has a fan that pulls air through the seat. The air is not cooled. When a heated seat is turned on, the symbol turns red. When a ventilated seat is turned on, the symbol turns blue.
The passenger seat may take longer to heat up.
Auto Heated and Ventilated Seats
If the vehicle is equipped with auto heated or ventilated seats, and the engine is on, this feature will

automatically activate the heated or ventilated seats at the level required by the vehicle's interior temperature.
The active high, medium, low, or off heated or ventilated seat level will be indicated by the manual heated and ventilated seat buttons on the center stack. Use the manual heated and ventilated seat buttons on the center stack to turn auto heated or ventilated seats off. If the passenger seat is unoccupied, the auto heated or ventilated seats feature will not activate that seat. The auto heated and ventilated seats feature can be programmed to always be enabled when the vehicle is on. If equipped with a heated steering wheel, the auto heated steering wheel activation will follow the heated seat auto activation and the heated wheel indicator will follow the state of the steering wheel heat.
See Vehicle Personalization 0 116.

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 41
Remote Start Heated and Ventilated Seats
If equipped, the heated seats will turn on automatically during a remote start if it is cold outside and the ventilated seats will turn on automatically if it is hot outside. If equipped, the heated steering wheel will turn on automatically during a remote start if it is cold outside. The heated and ventilated seat indicators and heated steering wheel indicator will come on during this operation.
The heated and ventilated seats and heated steering wheel may cancel when the vehicle is started. These features can be manually selected after the ignition is turned on.
The temperature performance of an unoccupied seat may be reduced. This is normal.
The heated or ventilated seats will not turn on during a remote start unless they are enabled in the vehicle personalization menu. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 14 and Vehicle Personalization 0 116.

42 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS Massage
If equipped, the ignition must be on to use the massage feature. To turn the massage feature on or off press the massage control button. When the massage feature is turned off, it will complete the massage cycle before returning to the initial position.

Rear Seats
Rear Seat Reminder
If equipped, the message REAR SEAT REMINDER LOOK IN REAR SEAT displays under certain conditions indicating there may be an item or passenger in the rear seat. Check before exiting the vehicle.
This feature will activate when a second row door is opened while the vehicle is on or up to 10 minutes before the vehicle is turned on. There will be an alert when the vehicle is turned off. The alert does not directly detect objects in the rear seat; instead, under certain conditions, it detects when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seat.
The feature is active only once each time the vehicle is turned on and off, and will require reactivation by opening and closing the second row doors. There may be an alert even when there is nothing in the rear seat; for example, if a child entered the

vehicle through the rear door and left the vehicle without the vehicle being shut off.
The feature can be turned on or off. See Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
Folding the Seatback
Either side of the seatback can be folded for more cargo space. Fold a seatback only when the vehicle is not moving.
Caution
Folding a rear seat with the seat belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the seat belts. Always unbuckle the seat belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat.
To fold the seatback:

1. Disconnect the rear seat belt mini-latch using a key in the slot on the mini-buckle, and let the belt retract.

2. Pull the lever on top of the seatback toward you to unlock the seatback.
A red tab near the seatback lever raises when the seatback is unlocked.
3. Fold the seatback forward.
Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to fold the other seatback, if desired.
Raising the Seatback
{ Warning
If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 43
{ Warning
A seat belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the seat belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To raise a seatback:
1. Lift the seatback up. Make sure the center seat belt and latch do not get trapped behind the seat. Push the seatback rearward to lock it in place.
A red tab near the seatback lever retracts when the seatback is locked in place.
2. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be sure it is locked into position.

44 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
3. Reconnect the center seat belt mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do not let the belt twist.
4. Pull on the center seat belt to make sure the mini-latch is secure.
5. Repeat the steps to raise the other seatback, if necessary.
When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the upright, locked position.

Seat Belts
This section describes how to use seat belts properly, and some things not to do.
{ Warning
Do not let anyone ride where a seat belt cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your passenger(s) are not wearing seat belts, injuries can be much worse than if you are wearing seat belts. You can be seriously injured or killed by hitting things inside the vehicle harder or by being ejected from the vehicle. In addition, anyone who is not buckled up can strike other passengers in the vehicle.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, passengers riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
not allow passengers to ride in any area of the vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Always wear a seat belt, and check that all passenger(s) are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the seat belts. See Seat Belt Reminders 0 97.
Why Seat Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travel as fast as the vehicle does. If the vehicle stops suddenly, you keep going until something stops you. It could be the windshield, the instrument panel, or the seat belts!
When you wear a seat belt, you and the vehicle slow down together. There is more time to stop because you stop over a longer distance and, when worn properly, your strongest bones take the forces from the seat belts. That is why wearing seat belts makes such good sense.
Questions and Answers About Seat Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a seat belt?
A: You could be -- whether you are wearing a seat belt or not. Your chance of being conscious during and after a crash, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear seat belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only. They work with seat belts -- not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
Also, in nearly all states and in all Canadian provinces, the law requires wearing seat belts.
How to Wear Seat Belts Properly
Follow these rules for everyone's protection.
There are additional things to know about seat belts and children, including smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the vehicle, see Older Children 0 63 or Infants and Young Children 0 65. Review and follow the rules for children in addition to the following rules.

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 45
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing seat belts. There are important things to know about wearing a seat belt properly.
. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you (if possible).
. Always use the correct buckle for your seating position.
. Wear the lap part of the belt low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong

46 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
. Wear the shoulder belt over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
{ Warning
You can be seriously injured, or even killed, by not wearing your seat belt properly.

Never allow the lap or shoulder belt to become loose or twisted.

Never wear the shoulder belt under both arms or behind your back.

Always use the correct buckle for your seating position.
Never route the lap or shoulder belt over an armrest.

{ Warning
The seat belt can be pinched if it is routed under plastic trim on the seat, such as trim around the rear seatback folding handle or side airbag. In a crash, pinched seat belts might not be able to provide adequate protection. Never allow seat belts to be routed under plastic trim pieces.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt.
If you are using a rear seating position with a detachable seat belt and the seat belt is not attached, see Rear Seats 0 42 for instructions on reconnecting the seat belt to the mini-buckle.
The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. If the seat has a seat belt guide, the seat belt must be routed through the guide to properly

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 47
position the shoulder belt. If the seat belt is not routed through the guide, slide the edge of the belt webbing through the opening on the guide. Be sure the belt is not twisted. 2. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see "Seats" in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the

48 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may be engaged. See Child Restraint Systems 0 67. If this occurs, let the belt go back all the way and start again. If the locking feature stays engaged after letting the belt go back to stowed position on the seat, move the seat rearward or recline the seat until the shoulder belt retractor lock releases.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the front outboard seating position may affect the passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System 0 57.

If the webbing locks in the latch plate before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate flat to unlock.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Seat Belt Extender 0 50.
Position the release button on the buckle so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to slide the adjustable stop along the webbing toward the outboard floor anchor to fully tighten the lap belt across the lap.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position. Always stow the seat belt slowly. If the seat belt webbing returns quickly to the stowed position, the retractor may lock and cannot be pulled out. If this happens, pull the seat belt straight out firmly to unlock the webbing, and

then release it. If the webbing is still locked in the retractor, see your dealer.
Before a door is closed, be sure the seat belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a seat belt, damage can occur to both the seat belt and the vehicle.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has seat belt pretensioners for the front outboard occupants. Although the seat belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the seat belt assembly. They can help tighten the seat belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met. Seat belt pretensioners can also help tighten the seat belts in a side crash or a rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, the pretensioners and probably other parts of the vehicle's seat belt system

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 49
will need to be replaced. See Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash 0 51.
Do not sit on the outboard seat belt while entering or exiting the vehicle or at any time while sitting in the seat. Sitting on the seat belt can damage the webbing and hardware.
Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides
Rear seat belt comfort guides may provide added seat belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the shoulder belt away from the neck and head.
Comfort guides are available through your dealer for the rear outboard seating positions. Instructions are included with the guides.

50 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS Seat Belt Use During Pregnancy
Seat belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear seat belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a seat belt is worn properly, it is more likely that

the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making seat belts effective is wearing them properly.
Seat Belt Extender
If the vehicle's seat belt will fasten around you, you should use it.
But if a seat belt is not long enough, your dealer will order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child restraints. For more information on the proper use and fit of seat belt extenders see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Safety System Check
Periodically check the seat belt reminder, seat belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), and seat belt anchorages to make sure they are all

in working order. Look for any other loose or damaged seat belt system parts that might keep a seat belt system from performing properly. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn, frayed, or twisted seat belts may not protect you in a crash. Torn or frayed seat belts can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, have it replaced immediately. If a belt is twisted, it may be possible to untwist by reversing the latch plate on the webbing. If the twist cannot be corrected, ask your dealer to fix it.
Make sure the seat belt reminder light is working. See Seat Belt Reminders 0 97.
Keep seat belts clean and dry. See Seat Belt Care 0 50.
Seat Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
Seat belts should be properly cared for and maintained.
Seat belt hardware should be kept dry and free of dust or debris. As necessary, exterior hard surfaces and seat belt webbing may be lightly

cleaned with mild soap and water. Ensure there is not excessive dust or debris in the mechanism. If dust or debris exists in the system please see the dealer. Parts may need to be replaced to ensure proper functionality of the system.
{ Warning
Do not bleach or dye seat belt webbing. It may severely weaken the webbing. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean and rinse seat belt webbing only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Allow the webbing to dry.
Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash
{ Warning
A crash can damage the seat belt system in the vehicle. A damaged seat belt system may not properly
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the seat belt systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.
After a minor crash, replacement of seat belts may not be necessary. But the seat belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer to have the seat belt assemblies inspected or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the seat belt system was not being used at the time of the crash.
Have the seat belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash, or if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 98.

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 51
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
. A frontal airbag for the driver
. A frontal airbag for the front outboard passenger
. A knee airbag for the driver.
. A knee airbag for the front outboard passenger.
. A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
. A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the front outboard passenger
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver
. A roof-rail airbag for the front outboard passenger and the passenger seated directly behind the front outboard passenger
All vehicle airbags have the word AIRBAG on the trim or on a label near the deployment opening.

52 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the center of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the front outboard passenger.
For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the lower part of the instrument panel.
For seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the side of the seatback or side of the seat closest to the door.
For roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by seat belts. Even though today's airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system:

{ Warning
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your seat belt, even with airbags. Airbags are designed to work with seat belts, not replace them. Also, airbags are not designed to inflate in every crash. In some crashes seat belts are the only restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? 0 54.
Wearing your seat belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are "supplemental restraints" to the seat belts. Everyone in the vehicle should wear a seat belt properly, whether or not there is an airbag for that person.

{ Warning
Because airbags inflate with great force and faster than the blink of an eye, anyone who is up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to any airbag, as you would be if sitting on the edge of the seat or leaning forward. Seat belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear a seat belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. The seat belts and the front outboard passenger airbags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning
Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Always secure children properly in the vehicle. To read how, see Older Children 0 63 or Infants and Young Children 0 65.

Where Are the Airbags?

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 53

There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 98.

The driver frontal airbag is in the center of the steering wheel.
The front outboard passenger frontal airbag is in the passenger side instrument panel.

The driver knee airbag is below the steering column. The front outboard passenger knee airbag is below the glove box.

54 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS

Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar
The driver and front outboard passenger seat-mounted side impact airbags are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, front outboard passenger, and second row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows.
{ Warning
If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie-down through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
This vehicle is equipped with airbags. See Airbag System 0 51. Airbags are designed to inflate if the impact exceeds the specific airbag system's deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used to predict how

severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. The vehicle has electronic sensors that help the airbag system determine the severity of the impact. Deployment thresholds can vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal, or near frontal, crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries, mainly to the driver's or front outboard passenger's head and chest.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should inflate is not based primarily on how fast the vehicle is traveling. It depends on what is hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds depending on whether the vehicle hits an object straight on or at an angle, and whether the object is fixed or moving, rigid or deformable, narrow or wide.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, in rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle has advanced technology frontal airbags. Advanced technology frontal airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Knee airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal impacts. Knee airbags are not designed to inflate during vehicle rollovers, in rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not designed to inflate in frontal impacts, near frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag is designed to inflate on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
Roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Roof-rail airbags are not designed to inflate in rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags will inflate when

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 55
either side of the vehicle is struck, if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over on its side, or in a severe frontal impact.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the vehicle damage or repair costs.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover. The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag module.
For airbag locations, see Where Are the Airbags? 0 53.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering

56 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by seat belts by distributing the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first and second rows. The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events, although no system can prevent all such ejections.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions, primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? 0 54.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to seat belts.

What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates?
After frontal, knee, and seat-mounted side impact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize the airbags inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they inflate. Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? 0 53.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags inflate. The feature may also activate, without airbag inflation, after an event that exceeds a predetermined threshold. After turning the ignition off and then on again, the fuel system will return

to normal operation; the doors can be locked, the interior lamps can be turned off, and the hazard warning flashers can be turned off using the controls for those features. If any of these systems are damaged in the crash they may not operate as normal.
{ Warning
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may have also damaged important functions in the vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may be concealed damage that could make it difficult to safely operate the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the engine after a crash has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.

Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the front outboard passenger airbag.
. Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
. The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 0 333 and Event Data Recorders 0 333.
. Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag system. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer for service.

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 57 Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position. The passenger airbag status indicator will light on the overhead console when the vehicle is started.
The words ON and OFF, and the symbols for on and off, will be visible during the system check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or OFF, and the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 99. The passenger sensing system turns off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag under certain conditions. No other airbag is affected by the passenger sensing system.

58 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front outboard passenger seat and seat belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag should be allowed to inflate or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size.
Whenever possible, children aged 12 and under should be secured in a rear seating position.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag inflates.
{ Warning
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger frontal airbag
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger frontal airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger airbag(s), no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat, even if the airbag is off. If securing a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure child restraints in the rear seat. Consider
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
using another vehicle to transport the child when a rear seat is not available.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag if:
. The front outboard passenger seat is unoccupied.
. The system determines an infant is present in a child restraint.
. A front outboard passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag, the OFF indicator will light and stay lit as a reminder that the airbags are off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 99.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and

knee airbag, anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front outboard passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbags to be enabled, the ON indicator will light and stay lit as a reminder that the airbags are active.
For some children, including children in child restraints, and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag, depending upon the person's seating posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a seat belt properly -- whether or not there is an airbag for that person.
{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 98 for more information, including important safety information.
If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child Restraint
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag, if the system determines that an infant is present in a child restraint. If a child restraint has been installed and the ON indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 59
manufacturer and refer to Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Seat) 0 78 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 76.
Make sure the seat belt retractor is locked by pulling the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor when installing the child restraint, even if the child restraint is equipped with a seat belt lock off. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the ON indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this

60 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints 0 34.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the airbags for a child in a child restraint depending upon the child's size. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat, even if the ON indicator is not lit.
If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an Adult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting in the front outboard passenger seat, but the OFF indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat or that the child restraint locking feature is engaged. Use the following steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged. This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing system to turn the airbag off for some

adult-sized occupants. If this happens, unbuckle the belt, let the belt go back all the way, and then buckle the belt again without pulling the belt out all the way.
6. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the ON indicator is lit.
{ Warning
If the front outboard passenger airbag is turned off for an adult-sized occupant, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect that person in a crash, resulting in an increased risk of serious injury or even death. An adult-sized occupant should not ride in the front outboard passenger seat, if the passenger airbag OFF indicator is lit.

Additional Factors Affecting System Operation
Seat belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status. See "Seat Belts" and "Child Restraints" in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates. We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 61 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates.
The ON indicator may be lit if an object, such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic

device, is put on an unoccupied seat. If this is not desired, remove the object from the seat.
{ Warning
Stowing articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system.
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see Publication Ordering Information 0 330.

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 61
{ Warning
For up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Adding accessories that change the vehicle's frame, bumper system, height, front end, or side sheet metal may keep the airbag system from working properly.
The operation of the airbag system can also be affected by changing, including improperly repairing or replacing, any parts of the following:

62 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
. Airbag system, including airbag modules, front or side impact sensors, sensing and diagnostic module, or airbag wiring
. Front seats, including stitching, seams or zippers
. Seat belts
. Steering wheel, instrument panel, overhead console, ceiling trim, or pillar garnish trim
. Inner door seals, including speakers
Your dealer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag modules and sensors, sensing and diagnostic module, and airbag wiring along with the proper replacement procedures.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position, which includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery, or trim; or with GM covers, upholstery, or trim designed for a different vehicle. Any

object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort-enhancing pad or device, installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system. This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing System 0 57.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see Different Size Tires and Wheels 0 284 for additional important information.
If the vehicle must be modified because you have a disability and have questions about whether the modifications will affect the vehicle's airbag system, or if you have questions about whether the airbag system will be affected if the vehicle is modified for any other reason, call Customer Assistance. See Customer Assistance Offices 0 323.

Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 98.
Caution
If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any opened or broken airbag coverings, have the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? 0 53. See your dealer for service.

Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash
{ Warning
A crash can damage the airbag systems in the vehicle. A damaged airbag system may not properly protect you and your passenger(s) in a crash, resulting in serious injury or even death. To help make sure the airbag systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. See your dealer for service.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on when you are driving, the airbag system may not work properly. Have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 98.

Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle's seat belts. The manufacturer instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the child passes the fit test below:

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 63
. Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear seat belt comfort guide, if available. See "Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides" under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 47. If a comfort guide is not available, or if the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat.
. Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
. Can proper seat belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to wear seat belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt

64 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Also see "Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides" under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 47.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in a rear seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use seat belts properly.
{ Warning
Never allow more than one child to wear the same seat belt. The seat belt cannot properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, they can
(Continued)

Warning (Continued) be crushed together and seriously injured. A seat belt must be used by only one person at a time.
{ Warning
Never allow a child to wear the seat belt with the shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.

Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{ Warning
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck. The shoulder belt can tighten but cannot be loosened if it is locked. The shoulder belt locks when it is pulled all the way out of the retractor. It unlocks when the shoulder belt is allowed to go all the way back into the retractor, but it cannot do this if it is wrapped around a child's neck. If the shoulder belt is locked and
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
tightened around a child's neck, the only way to loosen the belt is to cut it.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the seat belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints. Neither the vehicle's seat belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ Warning
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash.
(Continued)

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 65
Warning (Continued)
For example, in a crash at only 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's arms. An infant or child should be secured in an appropriate child restraint.

66 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS

{ Warning
Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front outboard seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go.

Child restraints are devices used to restrain, seat, or position children in the vehicle and are sometimes called child seats or car seats.
There are three basic types of child restraints:
. Forward-facing child restraints
. Rear-facing child restraints
. Belt-positioning booster seats
The proper child restraint for your child depends on their size, weight, and age, and also on whether the child restraint is compatible with the vehicle in which it will be used.

For each type of child restraint, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the child restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The instruction manual that is provided with the child restraint states the weight and height limitations for that particular child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of child restraints available for children with special needs.
{ Warning
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury in a crash, infants and toddlers should be secured in a rear-facing child restraint until age two, or until they reach the maximum height and weight limits of their child restraint.

{ Warning
A young child's hip bones are still so small that the vehicle seat belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young children should always be secured in an appropriate child restraint.

Child Restraint Systems
Rear-Facing Infant Restraint A rear-facing child restraint provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 67
Forward-Facing Child Restraint A forward-facing child restraint provides restraint for the child's body with the harness.

68 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
Booster Seats A belt-positioning booster seat is used for children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint. Boosters are designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's seat belt system until the child is large enough for the vehicle seat belts to fit properly without a booster seat. See the seat belt fit test in Older Children 0 63.

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle
{ Warning
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle seat belt or LATCH system, following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraints must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 70 for more information. Children can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the following:
1. Instruction labels provided on the child restraint
2. Instruction manual provided with the child restraint
3. This vehicle owner's manual
The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
In some areas Certified Child Passenger Safety Technicians (CPSTs) are available to inspect and demonstrate how to correctly use and install child restraints. In the U.S., refer to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) website to locate the nearest child safety seat inspection station. For CPST availability in Canada, check

with Transport Canada or the Provincial Ministry of Transportation office.
Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint
{ Warning
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint.
Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint secured in a rear seating position.
Whenever possible, children aged 12 and under should be secured in a rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great if the airbag deploys.
{ Warning
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off.
(Continued)

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 69
Warning (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System 0 57 for additional information.
When securing a child restraint with the seat belts in a rear seat position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Child restraints and booster seats vary considerably in size, and some may fit in certain seating positions better than others.
Depending on where you place the child restraint and the size of the child restraint, you may not be able to access adjacent seat belts or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or

70 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
child restraints. Adjacent seating positions should not be used if the child restraint prevents access to or interferes with the routing of the seat belt.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System)
The LATCH system secures a child restraint during driving or in a crash. LATCH attachments on the child restraint are used to attach the child restraint to the anchors in the vehicle. The LATCH system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments. LATCH-compatible rear-facing and forward-facing child seats can be properly installed using either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle's seat belts. Do not use both the seat belts and the LATCH anchorage system to secure a rear-facing or forward-facing child seat.
Booster seats use the vehicle's seat belts to secure the child and the booster seat. If the manufacturer recommends that the booster seat be secured with the LATCH system, this can be done as long as the booster seat can be positioned properly and there is no interference with the proper positioning of the lap-shoulder belt on the child.
Make sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the lower anchors or the seat belts to properly secure the child restraint.

A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether and anchor.
For a forward-facing 5-pt harness child restraint where the combined weight of the child and restraint are up to 29.5 kg (65 lb), use either the lower LATCH anchorages with the top tether anchorage, or the seat belt with the top tether anchorage. Where the combined weight of the child and restraint are greater than 29.5 kg (65 lb), use the seat belt with the top tether anchorage only.

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 71

Restraint Type
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint

Recommended Methods for Attaching Child Restraints

Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint

Use Only Approved Attachment Methods Shown with an X

LATCH ­ Lower Seat Belt Only Anchors Only

LATCH ­ Lower Anchors and Top Tether Anchor

Seat Belt and Top Tether Anchor

Up to

X

X

29.5 kg (65 lb)

Greater than

X

29.5 kg (65 lb)

Up to 29.5 kg (65 lb)

X

X

Greater than

X

29.5 kg (65 lb)

See Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Seat) 0 78 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 76.
Child restraints built after March 2014 will be labeled with the specific child weight up to which the LATCH system can be used to install the restraint.
The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions have lower anchors. In this case, the seat belt must be used (with top tether where available) to secure the child restraint. See Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Seat) 0 78 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 76.

72 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS

Lower Anchors

Top Tether Anchor

Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations

Lower anchors (1) are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments (2).

A top tether (3,4) is used to secure the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment hook (2) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
The child restraint may have a single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Either will have a single attachment hook (2) to secure the top tether to the anchor.

Rear Seat
I : Seating positions with top tether
anchors.

H : Seating positions with two lower
anchors.
To assist in locating the lower anchors, each seating position with lower anchors has two labels, near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.
To assist in locating the top tether anchors, the top tether anchor symbol is on the cover.

The lower anchors are located under the labeled covers on the seat cushion near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 73
The top tether anchors are behind the rear seat, on the filler panel. Open the covers to access the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located directly behind the seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint 0 69 for additional information.

74 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System
{ Warning
A child could be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly attached to the vehicle using either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle seat belt. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual.
{ Warning
To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor. Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash. A child or others could be injured.

{ Warning
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck. The shoulder belt can tighten but cannot be loosened if it is locked. The shoulder belt locks when it is pulled all the way out of the retractor. It unlocks when the shoulder belt is allowed to go all the way back into the retractor, but it cannot do this if it is wrapped around a child's neck. If the shoulder belt is locked and tightened around a child's neck, the only way to loosen the belt is to cut it.
Buckle any unused seat belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, and tighten the belt behind the child restraint after the child restraint has been installed.

{ Warning
The power seats will work with the ignition off. Children could operate the power seats and be injured. Never leave children alone in the vehicle.
Caution
Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle's seat belts. This may damage these parts. If necessary, move buckled seat belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
If you need to secure more than one child restraint in the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restraint 0 69.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint with

the top tether and the seat belt. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Open the top tether anchor cover to expose the anchor.

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 75
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions:

If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback.

If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether over the seatback.

If the position you are using has an adjustable head restraint and you are using a single tether, raise the head restraint and

76 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
route the tether under the head restraint and in between the head restraint posts.
If the position you are using has an adjustable head restraint and you are using a dual tether, raise the head restraint and route the tether under the head restraint and in between the head restraint posts. 3. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check,

grasp the child restraint at the LATCH path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. There should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement for proper installation.
Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash
{ Warning
A crash can damage the LATCH system in the vehicle. A damaged LATCH system may not properly secure the child restraint, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the LATCH system is working properly after a crash, see your dealer to have the system inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash, new LATCH system parts may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the LATCH system was not being used at the time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint with the seat belts in a rear seat position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 70 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a seat belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 70 for top tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.
If the child restraint or vehicle seat position does not have the LATCH system, you will be using the seat belt to secure the child restraint. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint 0 69.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
If the head restraint interferes with the proper installation of the child restraint, see your dealer for assistance.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle seat belt through or around the child restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button on the buckle, away from the child restraint, so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 77
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.

78 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 70.
7. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the seat belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
If the head restraint was removed, reinstall it before the seating position

is used. See "Head Restraint Removal and Reinstallation" under Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 70 for additional information on installing the head restraint properly.
Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Seat)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint 0 69.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing System 0 57 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 99 for more information, including important safety information.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger airbag(s), no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System 0 57 for additional information.
If the child restraint uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 70 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 79
When using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position, follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and the following instructions:
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. Move the seat upward or the seatback to an upright position, if needed, to get a tight installation of the child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag, the OFF indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 99.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle seat belt through or around the child restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

80 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle, away from the child restraint, so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
It may be necessary to slide the adjustable stop along the webbing toward the outboard anchor to fully tighten the seat belt around the child restraint. While a child restraint is installed, the adjustable stop should be positioned on the portion of the webbing that does not interact with the child restraint.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the seat belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbags are off, the OFF indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the ON indicator is lit, see "If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child Restraint" under Passenger Sensing System 0 57.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and let it return to the stowed position.

SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 81

82 STORAGE
Storage
Storage Compartments Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Additional Storage Features Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Cargo Management System . . . . . . . 83

Storage Compartments
{ Warning
Do not store heavy or sharp objects in storage compartments. In a crash, these objects may cause the cover to open and could result in injury.
Glove Box

Cupholders
There are two cupholders in the front center console.

Pull the handle from the right to open the glove box. To close, push up until it latches. Use the vehicle key to lock or unlock.

The cupholder has a removable liner.
To clean the liner, remove and use mild soap and water. Dry the liner completely before reinstalling.
To remove the liner, pull up on the tab and remove.
To reinstall the liner, press into the cupholder with the key logo in the rear cupholder.

STORAGE 83
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Tie-Downs

Rear Cupholders
Pull the armrest down to access the rear cupholders.
Center Console Storage
The SD card is used for navigation. Do not remove the card from the holder. See the infotainment manual.

Press the button and lift to access the storage area. There is an accessory power outlet, two USB ports, and an SD card slot inside. See Power Outlets 0 89 or "USB Port" in the infotainment manual.
If equipped, there is a removable phone holder to store a phone and the cord while charging.

The cargo tie-downs can be used to secure small loads inside the trunk.
Cargo Management System
The vehicle has a cargo management system in the trunk.

84 STORAGE
Lift up on the load floor and push forward.

Instruments and Controls
Controls Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . 86 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . 86 Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . 86 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 85

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Brake System Warning Light . . . . 102 Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . . 102 Service Electric Parking Brake
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH)
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light . . . 103 Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . 104 Pedestrian Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 104 Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Traction Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Driver Mode Control Light . . . . . . . 106 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . 107 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 107 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Information Displays Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . . . . 111
Vehicle Messages Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Engine Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . 115 Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . 115
Vehicle Personalization Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . . . . 116
Universal Remote System Universal Remote System . . . . . . . . 121 Universal Remote System Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Universal Remote System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

86 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Controls

Steering Wheel Controls

Steering Wheel Adjustment

The infotainment system can be operated by using the steering wheel controls. See "Steering Wheel Controls" in the infotainment manual.

Heated Steering Wheel

To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel closer or away from you.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

( : If equipped, press to turn the
heated steering wheel on or off. An indicator light next to the button displays when the feature is turned on.
The steering wheel takes about three minutes to be fully heated.

Automatic Heated Steering Wheel
If equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel will turn on automatically during a remote start along with the heated seats when it is cold outside. The heated steering wheel indicator light may not come on.
If equipped with auto heated seats, the heated steering wheel will turn on when the auto heated seat is activated. The heated steering wheel indicator will display the state of the steering wheel heat. See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 40.
Horn
Press a on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
Windshield Wiper/Washer

With the ignition on or in ACC/ ACCESSORY, move the windshield wiper lever to select the wiper speed. HI : Use for fast wipes. LO : Use for slow wipes.
INT : Use this setting for intermittent wipes or for Rainsense wipes, when Rainsense is enabled. For intermittent wipes, move the lever up to INT, then
turn the O band up for more
frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes. If Rainsense is enabled, see "Rainsense" later in this section. If the windshield wipers are in use while driving, the exterior lamps come on automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO. The transition time for the lamps coming on varies

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 87

based on wiper speed. See "Lights On with Wipers" under Automatic Headlamp System 0 128.
OFF : Use to turn the wipers off.
1X : For a single wipe, briefly move the wiper lever down. For several wipes, hold the wiper lever down.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and windshield before using them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Damaged blades should be replaced. See Wiper Blade Replacement 0 256.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.

{ Warning
Before driving the vehicle, always clear snow and ice from the hood, windshield, roof, and rear of the vehicle, including all lamps and windows. Reduced visibility from snow and ice buildup could lead to a crash.
Wiper Parking
If the ignition is turned off while the wipers are on LO, HI, or INT with Rainsense disabled, they will immediately stop.

{ Warning
In freezing weather, do not use the washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.

If the windshield wiper lever is then moved to OFF before the driver door is opened or within 10 minutes, the wipers will restart and move to the base of the windshield.
If the ignition is turned off while the wipers are performing wipes due to windshield washing or Rainsense, the wipers continue to run until they reach the base of the windshield.

88 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Rainsense
If equipped with Rainsense, a sensor near the top center of the windshield detects the amount of water on the windshield and controls the frequency of the windshield wiper. To turn this feature on or off, see "Rainsense Wipers" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
Keep this area of the windshield clear of debris to allow for best system performance.
AUTO : When enabled, move the windshield wiper lever to AUTO. Turn
the O band on the wiper lever to
adjust the sensitivity.

. Move the windshield wiper lever out of the AUTO position to deactivate Rainsense.
Wiper Arm Assembly Protection
When using an automatic car wash, move the windshield wiper lever to OFF. This disables the automatic Rainsense windshield wipers.
With Rainsense, if the transmission is in N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed is very slow, the wipers will automatically stop at the base of the windshield.
The wiper operations return to normal when the transmission is no longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle speed has increased.

. Turn the band up for more sensitivity to moisture.
. Turn the band down for less sensitivity to moisture.

f : Pull the windshield wiper lever
toward you to spray windshield washer fluid and activate the wipers. The wipers will continue until the lever is released or the maximum wash time is reached. When the windshield wiper lever is released, additional wipes may occur depending on how long the windshield washer

had been activated. See Washer Fluid 0 252 for information on filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Compass
The vehicle has a compass display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). The compass receives its heading and other information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and vehicle speed information.
The compass system is designed to operate for a certain number of miles or degrees of turn before needing a signal from the GPS satellites. When the compass display shows CAL, drive the vehicle for a short distance in an open area where it can receive a GPS signal. The compass system will automatically determine when a GPS signal is restored and provide a heading again.
Clock
The time and date for the clock can be set using the infotainment system. See "Time/Date" in "System" under "Settings" in the infotainment manual.

Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
The vehicle has two accessory power outlets:
. Inside the center console storage area.
. On the rear of the center floor console.
Lift the cover to access the accessory power outlet.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could overload a vehicle circuit breaker or adapter fuse. If overloaded, the circuit breaker will reset after all devices are disconnected or if Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is turned off and then back on. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 163. Wait one minute to allow the circuit breaker to reset before reconnecting devices or turning RAP back on. If the problem continues, the issue could be within your device. Try another known good device to make sure the

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 89

circuit breaker is operating properly. If this does not resolve your problem, see your dealer.
Caution
Failure to replace the circuit breaker with the minifuse could overheat the cigar lighter and damage the vehicle.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 231.

Always unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 15 amps rating.
Wireless Charging
The vehicle may have a wireless charging pad below the climate controls. The system operates at 145 kHz and wirelessly charges one Qi compatible smartphone. The power output of the system is capable of charging at a rate up to 3 amp (15W), as requested by the compatible smartphone. See Radio Frequency Statement 0 331.

Caution
Hanging heavy equipment from the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. The power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only, such as cell phone charge cords.

{ Warning
Wireless charging can affect the operation of an implanted pacemaker or other medical devices. If you have one, it is recommended to consult with your doctor before using the wireless charging system.

The vehicle must be on, in ACC/ ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active. The

90 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
wireless charging feature may not correctly indicate charging when the vehicle is in RAP. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 163.
The operating temperature is -20 °C (-4 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F) for the charging system and 0 °C (32 °F) to 35 °C (95 °F) for the smartphone.

{ Warning
Remove all objects from the charging pad before charging your compatible smartphone. Objects, such as coins, keys, rings, paper clips, or cards, between the smartphone and charging pad will become very hot. On the rare occasion that the charging system does not detect an object, and the object gets wedged between the smartphone and charger, remove the smartphone and allow the object to cool before removing it from the charging pad, to prevent burns.

To charge a compatible smartphone:
1. Remove all objects from the charging pad. The system may not charge if there are any objects between the smartphone and charging pad.
2. Place the smartphone face up on
the @ symbol on the
charging pad.
To maximize the charge rate, ensure the smartphone is fully seated and centered in the holder with nothing under it. A thick smartphone case may prevent the wireless charger from

working, or may reduce the charging performance. See your dealer for additional information.
3. A green $ next to the # will
appear on the infotainment display. This indicates that the smartphone is properly positioned and charging.
If the $ turns yellow, ensure that
the charging pad is clear of any objects and that the smartphone is capable of wireless charging before re-positioning it.
If the $ does not illuminate, the
smartphone may need to be repositioned. To reposition, turn the smartphone 180 degrees and wait three seconds before placing/aligning it on the pad again.
The smartphone may become warm during charging. This is normal. In warmer temperatures, the speed of charging maybe be reduced.

Software Acknowledgements
Certain Wireless Charging Module product from LG Electronics, Inc. ("LGE") contains the open source software detailed below. Refer to the indicated open source licenses (as are included following this notice) for the terms and conditions of their use.
OSS Notice Information
To obtain the source code that is contained in this product, please visit http://opensource.lge.com. In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers and copyright notices are available for download. LG Electronics will also provide open source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution (such as the cost of media, shipping, and handling) upon email request to opensource@lge.com. This offer is valid for three (3) years from the date on which you purchased the product.
Freescale-WCT library
Copyright (c) 2012-2014 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.. All rights reserved.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 91

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

92 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.
Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there may be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.

Instrument Cluster

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 93

English Base Level Cluster Shown, Metric Similar

94 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
English Uplevel Cluster Shown, Metric Similar

Cluster Menu There is an interactive display area in the center of the instrument cluster.
Use the right steering wheel control to open and scroll through the different items and displays.
Press S or T to access the cluster
applications. Use the thumbwheel to scroll through the list of available features within the applications. Not all applications or features will be available on all vehicles.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 95

. Info App. This is where the selected Driver Information Center (DIC) displays can be viewed. See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 109.
. Audio
. Navigation
. Phone
. Options
Audio
In the Audio menu browse for music, select from the favorites, or change the audio source. Use the thumbwheel to change the station or go to the next or previous track.
Navigation
If there is an active route, press the thumbwheel to cancel or resume route guidance, or turn the voice prompts on or off.
Phone
In the Phone menu, if there is no active phone call, view recent calls, or scroll through contacts. If there is an active call, mute the phone or switch to handset operation.

Options
Use the thumbwheel to scroll through items in the Options menu.
Units : Choose English or metric units by pressing the thumbwheel while the desired item is highlighted.
Info Page Options : Press the thumbwheel to select the items to be displayed in the Info app. See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 109.
Display : Press the thumbwheel to enter the Display menu. Select to turn on or off the speedometer, time, fuel range, or, if equipped, compass or speed sign.
Head-up Display (HUD) (Uplevel) : If equipped, this feature allows for adjusting the angle of the HUD image and changing or turning off the Speed Limit Sign.
HUD Rotation (Uplevel): Press the thumbwheel while Adjust Rotation is highlighted to enter Adjust Mode. Scroll to adjust the angle of the HUD display. Press the thumbwheel to confirm and save the setting. This feature may only be available in P (Park).

96 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Speed Sign: If equipped, press the thumbwheel while Speed Sign is highlighted to turn it on or off.
Speed Warning : The Speed Warning display allows the driver to set a warning at a speed that they do not want to exceed. To set the Speed Warning press the thumbwheel when Speed Warning is displayed. Use the thumbwheel to adjust the value and press to set the speed.
Once the speed is set, this feature can be turned off by pressing the thumbwheel while viewing this page. If the selected speed limit is exceeded, a pop-up warning is displayed with a chime.
Software Information : Displays open source software information.
Remote Relearn : If equipped, this feature allows for the vehicle to relearn remote keys.
See "Programming with Recognized Remote Keys" under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8.

Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle's speed in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either kilometers or miles.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last reset.
The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 109.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
For vehicles with the Stop/Start system, when the ignition is on, the tachometer indicates the vehicle status. When pointing to AUTO STOP, the engine is off but the vehicle is on

and can move. The engine could auto start at any time. When the indicator points to OFF, the vehicle is off. When the engine is on, the tachometer will indicate the engine's revolutions per minute (rpm). The tachometer may vary by several hundred rpm's, during Auto Stop mode, when the engine is shutting off and restarting.
Fuel Gauge
When the ignition is on, the fuel gauge indicates about how much fuel is left in the tank.

There is an arrow near the fuel gauge pointing to the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on.
When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light comes on. There still is a little fuel left, but the vehicle should be refueled soon.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None of these show a problem with the fuel gauge:
. At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gauge reads full.
. It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank's capacity to fill the tank.
. The gauge moves a little while turning a corner or speeding up.
. The gauge takes a few seconds to stabilize after the ignition is turned on, and goes back to empty when the ignition is turned off.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
English

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 97
Metric This gauge measures the temperature of the vehicle's engine. While driving under normal operating conditions, if the red LED is illuminated, the engine is too hot. Pull off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
Seat Belt Reminders
Driver Seat Belt Reminder Light There is a driver seat belt reminder light on the instrument cluster.

98 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

When the vehicle is started, this light flashes and a chime may come on to remind the driver to fasten their seat belt. Then the light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle may continue several times if the driver remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving.
If the driver seat belt is buckled, neither the light nor the chime comes on.
Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Light
There is a passenger seat belt reminder light near the passenger airbag status indicator. See Passenger Sensing System 0 57.

When the vehicle is started, this light flashes and a chime may come on to remind passengers to fasten their seat belt. Then the light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle continues several times if the passenger remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving.
If the passenger seat belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger seat belt reminder light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device. To turn off the reminder light and/or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the seat belt.

Airbag Readiness Light
This light shows if there is an electrical problem with the airbag system. The system check includes the airbag sensor(s), the passenger sensing system, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring, and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System 0 51.
The airbag readiness light comes on for several seconds when the vehicle is started. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed immediately.
{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it means
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
the airbag system might not be working properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also come on.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System 0 57 for important safety information. The overhead console has a passenger airbag status indicator.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 99

When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, and the symbols for on and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, and either the symbol for on or off, to let you know the status of the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag.
If the word ON, and the on symbol, is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag are allowed to inflate.

{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 98 for more information, including important safety information.
Charging System Light

If the word OFF, and the off symbol, is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag.
If, after several seconds, all of the symbols remain lit, or if no symbols are lit, or if the airbag readiness light is on, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer for service right away.

The charging system light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show the light is working. It should go out when the engine is started.

100 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

If the light stays on, or comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the electrical charging system. Have it checked by your dealer. Driving while this light is on could drain the battery.
When this light comes on, or is flashing, the Driver Information Center (DIC) also displays a message.
If a short distance must be driven with the light on, be sure to turn off all accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.

Malfunctions are often indicated by the system before any problem is noticeable. Being aware of the light and seeking service promptly when it comes on may prevent damage.
Caution

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light)
This light is part of the vehicle's emission control on-board diagnostic system. If this light is on while the engine is running, a malfunction has been detected and the vehicle may require service. The light should come on to show that it is working when the ignition is in Service Mode. See Ignition Positions 0 158.

If the vehicle is driven continually with this light on, the emission control system may not work as well, the fuel economy may be lower, and the vehicle may not run smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Caution
Modifications to the engine, transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system, or the use of replacement tires that do not meet the original tire specifications, can cause this light to come on. This could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This could also affect the vehicle's ability to pass an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories and Modifications 0 235.
If the light is flashing : A malfunction has been detected that could damage the emission control system and increase vehicle emissions. Diagnosis and service may be required.
To help prevent damage, reduce vehicle speed and avoid hard accelerations and uphill grades. If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as possible.

If the light continues to flash, find a safe place to park. Turn the vehicle off and wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous guidelines and see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is on steady : A malfunction has been detected. Diagnosis and service may be required.
Check the following:
. If fuel has been added to the vehicle using the capless fuel funnel adapter, make sure that it has been removed. See "Filling the Tank with a Portable Gas Can" under Filling the Tank 0 222. The diagnostic system can detect if the adapter has been left installed in the vehicle, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the adapter removed may turn off the light.
. Poor fuel quality can cause inefficient engine operation and poor driveability, which may go away once the engine is warmed

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 101

up. If this occurs, change the fuel brand. It may require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. See Recommended Fuel (LSY 2.0L L4 Turbo Engine) 0 221 or Recommended Fuel (L3B 2.7L L4 Turbo Engine) 0 221.
If the light remains on, see your dealer.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs
If the vehicle requires an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test, the test equipment will likely connect to the vehicle's Data Link Connector (DLC).

vehicle may affect vehicle operation. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 231. See your dealer if assistance is needed.
The vehicle may not pass inspection if:
. The light is on when the engine is running.
. The light does not come on when the ignition is in Service Mode.
. Critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed. If this happens, the vehicle would not be ready for inspection and might require several days of routine driving before the system is ready for inspection. This can happen if the 12-volt battery has recently been replaced or run down, or if the vehicle has been recently serviced.

The DLC is under the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. Connecting devices that are not used to perform an Emissions Inspection/ Maintenance test or to service the

See your dealer if the vehicle will not pass or cannot be made ready for the test.

102 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Brake System Warning Light

Metric

English

This light should come on briefly when the vehicle is turned on. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If the light comes on and stays on at start up, there is a brake problem. Have the brake system inspected right away.

{ Warning
The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for service.
Electric Parking Brake Light

If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. The brake system has electric brake boost. Vehicle speed may be limited when the brake system warning light comes on. The brake pedal might be harder to push, or the brake pedal may go closer to the floor. It could take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing the Vehicle 0 291.

Metric

English Base Level

English Uplevel
The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) status light comes on when the parking brake is applied. If the light continues flashing after the EPB is released, or while driving, there is a problem with the EPB system. A message may also display on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
If the light does not come on, or remains flashing, see your dealer.
Service Electric Parking Brake Light

On some vehicles the service electric parking brake light should come on briefly when the vehicle is started. If it does not come on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem. For vehicles with the reconfigurable cluster, this light may not come on when the vehicle is started. If this light stays on, the vehicle should be taken to a dealer as soon as possible. See Electric Parking Brake 0 179. A message may also display in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light should come on briefly when the vehicle is turned on. If the light does not come on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 103

If the light comes on while driving, safely stop as soon as it is possible and turn off the vehicle. Then turn on the vehicle again to reset the system.
If the ABS warning light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. A chime may also sound when the light stays on.

This light comes on when AVH is turned on. See Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH) 0 181.
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light

If the ABS warning light is the only light on, the vehicle has regular brakes, but ABS is not functioning.

If both the ABS warning light and the brake system warning light are on, ABS is not functioning and there is a problem with the regular brakes. See your dealer for service.
See Brake System Warning Light 0 102.
Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH) Light

After the vehicle is started, this light turns off and stays off if LKA has not been turned on or is unavailable.
If available, this light is white if LKA is turned on, but not ready to assist. This light is green if LKA is turned on and is ready to assist.
LKA may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking. The LKA light is amber when assisting.

104 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

This light flashes amber as a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert, to indicate that the lane marking has been crossed.

Pedestrian Ahead Indicator

LKA will not assist or alert if the turn signal is active in the direction of lane departure, or if LKA detects that you are accelerating, braking, or actively steering.
See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 219.
Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator will display amber when a nearby pedestrian is detected in front of the vehicle.
See Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System 0 214.

Traction Off Light

The traction off light comes on when the Traction Control System (TCS) has been turned off by pressing and releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) button.
This light and the StabiliTrak OFF light come on when StabiliTrak/ESC is turned off.
If the TCS is off, wheel speed will be limited when necessary to protect the driveline from damage. Adjust driving accordingly.
See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 182.
StabiliTrak OFF Light

If equipped, this indicator will display green when a vehicle is detected ahead and amber when you are following a vehicle ahead much too closely.
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 210.

This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light then turns off.

This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.

This light comes on when the StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is turned off. If StabiliTrak/ESC is off, the Traction Control System (TCS) is also off.
If StabiliTrak/ESC and TCS are off, the system does not assist in controlling the vehicle. Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTrak/ESC systems, and the warning light turns off.
See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 182.
Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 105

If the light is on and not flashing, the TCS and potentially the StabiliTrak/ ESC system have been disabled. A Driver Information Center (DIC) message may display. Check the DIC messages to determine which feature(s) is no longer functioning and whether the vehicle requires service.
If the light is on and flashing, the TCS and/or the StabiliTrak/ESC system is actively working.
See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 182.

For vehicles with the reconfigurable cluster, this light may not come on when starting the vehicle.
Caution
The engine coolant temperature warning light indicates that the vehicle has overheated. Driving with this light on can damage the engine and it may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. See Engine Overheating 0 250.

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on when the engine has overheated.
If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating 0 250.

This light comes on briefly when the engine is started.
If the light does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light turns off.

On some vehicles this light comes on briefly while starting the vehicle. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the dealer. If the system is working normally the indicator light goes off.

106 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Driver Mode Control Light

This light comes on when Sport Mode is selected.

This light comes on when V Mode is selected. See Driver Mode Control 0 184.

This light comes on when Snow/Ice Mode is selected.

This light comes on when My Mode is selected. See Driver Mode Control 0 184.
Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this light comes on briefly when the engine is started. It provides information about tire pressures and the TPMS.
When the Light Is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires are significantly underinflated.
A Driver Information Center (DIC) tire pressure message may also display. Stop as soon as possible, and inflate the tires to the pressure value shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire Pressure 0 275.
When the Light Flashes First and Then Is On Steady
If the light flashes for about a minute and then stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. If the problem is not corrected, the light will come on at every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 278.

This light comes on when Track Mode is selected. See Driver Mode Control 0 184.

Engine Oil Pressure Light
Caution
Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine. Driving with the engine oil low can also damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Check the oil level as soon as possible. Add oil if required, but if the oil level is within the operating range and the oil pressure is still low, have the vehicle serviced. Always follow the maintenance schedule for changing engine oil.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 107

If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle could be low on oil and might have some other system problem. See your dealer.

Security Light

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge and comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on as a check to show it is working.
It also comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel. The light turns off when fuel is added. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced.

The security light should come on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light turns off.
If the light stays on and the engine does not start, there could be a problem with the theft-deterrent system. See Immobilizer Operation 0 24.
High-Beam On Light

This light should come on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.

108 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

This light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 0 127.
IntelliBeam Light

This light comes on when the exterior lamps are in use, except when only the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) are active. See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 125.
Cruise Control Light

This light comes on when Adaptive Cruise Control (if equipped) is active. See Adaptive Cruise Control 0 194.
Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when the IntelliBeam system, if equipped, is enabled. See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 125.
Lamps On Reminder

The cruise control light is white when the cruise control is on and ready, and turns green when the cruise control is set and active. See Cruise Control 0 192.
Adaptive Cruise Control Light

This light comes on when a door is open or not securely latched. Before driving, check that all doors are properly closed.

Information Displays
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC is displayed in the instrument cluster. It shows the status of many vehicle systems.
S or T : Press to move between the
interactive display zones in the
cluster. Press S to go back to the
previous menu.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 109

y or z : Use the thumbwheel to
scroll to the previous or next selection.
V : Press the thumbwheel to open a
menu or select a menu item. Press and hold to reset values on certain screens.
Info Page Options
The info displays on the DIC can be turned on or off through the Options menu.
1. Press T to scroll to the Options
menu. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to Info Pages and press the thumbwheel to select.
2. Scroll y or z to move through
the list of possible info displays.
3. Press the thumbwheel while an item is highlighted to select or deselect that item.
The info pages can also be turned on or off through the DIC Info Page Options.

DIC Information Displays
The following is the list of all possible DIC information displays. Some of the information displays may not be available for your particular vehicle.
While in the Info Page Options menu, the info pages can be restored to the default factory settings by pressing
and holding R on the left steering
wheel controls and the thumbwheel on the right steering wheel controls at the same time.
Speed : Shows the vehicle speed in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).
Trip 1 or Trip 2 and Average Fuel Economy : The Trip display shows the current distance traveled, in either kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since the trip odometer was last reset. The trip odometer can be reset by pressing
V and selecting yes or no while this
display is active.
The Average Fuel Economy display shows the approximate average liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg). This number is calculated based on the number of

110 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the last time this menu item was reset. This number reflects only the approximate average fuel economy that the vehicle has right now, and will change as driving conditions change. The Average Fuel Economy
can be reset by pressing V and
selecting yes or no while this display is active.
Fuel Range : Shows the approximate distance the vehicle can be driven without refueling. LOW will be displayed when the vehicle is low on fuel. The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle's fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
Oil Life : Shows an estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is displayed, that means 99% of the current oil life remains.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. The oil should be changed as soon as possible. See Engine Oil 0 241. In

addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended. See Maintenance Schedule 0 303.
The Oil Life display must be reset after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Do not reset the Oil Life display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset the engine
oil life system, press V and then
select yes or no. See Engine Oil Life System 0 243.
Tire Pressure : Shows the approximate pressures of all four tires. Tire pressure is displayed in either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per square inch (psi). If the pressure is low, the value for that tire is shown in amber. See Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 277 and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 278.
Fuel Economy : Displays average fuel economy, the best fuel economy over the selected distance, and a bar graph showing instantaneous fuel economy.

Average Speed : Displays the average vehicle speed of the vehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph). This average is based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset. Reset the average speed by pressing the thumbwheel while this display is active to show a confirmation window to select yes or no.
Timer : This display can be used as a timer. To start the timer, press the thumbwheel while this display is active. The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset. To stop the timer, press the thumbwheel briefly while this display is active and the timer is running.
Press the thumbwheel while this display is active to reset the timer.
Follow Distance/Gap Setting : When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not engaged, the current follow time to the vehicle ahead is displayed as a time value on this page. When ACC has been engaged, the display

switches to the gap setting page. This page shows the current gap setting along with the vehicle ahead telltale.
Driver Assistance : If equipped, shows information for Lane Keep Assist (LKA) and Forward Collision Alert (FCA).
Battery Voltage : Shows the current battery voltage.
Coolant Temperature : Shows the engine coolant temperature in either degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
Oil Temperature : Shows the engine oil temperature in either degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
Engine Hours (Hourmeter) : Shows the total number of hours the engine has run. The display also shows the engine idle hours.
Engine Boost : Displays engine manifold pressure relative to ambient air pressure. It will display boost pressure generated by the turbocharging system.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 111

Transmission Fluid Temperature : Shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F).

windshield. The information is projected through the HUD lens on the driver side of the instrument panel and focused out toward the front of the vehicle.

Info Page Options : Scroll to choose which info pages appear on the DIC. Press the thumbwheel to select or deselect.
Blank Page : Allows for no information to be displayed in the cluster info display areas.

Caution
If you try to use the HUD image as a parking aid, you may misjudge the distance and damage your vehicle. Do not use the HUD image as a parking aid.

Head-Up Display (HUD)
{ Warning
If the HUD image is too bright or too high in your field of view, it may take you more time to see things you need to see when it is dark outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed low in your field of view.
If equipped with HUD, some information concerning the operation of the vehicle is projected onto the

The HUD information can be displayed in various languages. The speedometer reading and other numerical values can be displayed in either English or metric units.
The language selection is changed through the radio and the units of measurement is changed through the instrument cluster. See "Settings" in the Infotainment Manual and "Options" under Instrument Cluster 0 93.

112 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Some vehicle messages or alerts displayed in the HUD may be cleared by using the steering wheel controls. See Vehicle Messages 0 115.

HUD Display on the Windshield
The HUD may display some of the following vehicle information and vehicle messages or alerts: . Speed . Audio . Phone . Navigation . Performance . Driver Assistance Features . Vehicle Messages

The HUD control is to the left of the steering wheel.
To adjust the HUD image:
1. Adjust the driver seat.
2. Start the engine.
3. Use the following settings to adjust the HUD.
$ : Press or lift to center the HUD
image. The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down, not side to side.
! : Press to select the display view.
Each press will change the display view.

D : Lift and hold to brighten the
display. Press and hold to dim the display. Continue to hold to turn the display off.
The HUD image will automatically dim and brighten to compensate for outside lighting. The HUD brightness control can also be adjusted as needed.
The HUD image can temporarily light up depending on the angle and position of sunlight on the HUD display. This is normal.
Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image harder to see.
Head-Up Display (HUD) Rotation Option
This feature allows for adjusting the angle of the HUD image.
Press SEL on the steering wheel controls while Head-up Display Rotation is highlighted to enter Main View. From Main View, press SEL to
enter the Adjust Menu. Press y or z
to adjust the angle of the HUD
display. Press S or T to highlight OK,
then press SEL to save the setting.

CANCEL can also be selected to cancel the setting. The vehicle must be in P (Park). See Instrument Cluster 0 93.
HUD Views
There are four views in the HUD. Some vehicle information and vehicle messages or alerts may be displayed in any view.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 113

and set speed. Some information only appears on vehicles that have these features, and when they are active.

Incoming phone calls appearing in the instrument cluster may also display in any HUD view.

Metric

Metric

Metric
English Speed View : This displays digital speed in English or metric units, speed limit, vehicle ahead indicator, Lane Departure Warning/Lane Keep Assist, and Adaptive Cruise Control

English
Audio/Phone View : This displays digital speed, indicators from speed view along with audio/phone information. The current radio station, media type, and incoming calls will be displayed.
All HUD views may briefly display audio information when the driver uses the steering wheel controls to adjust the audio settings appearing in the instrument cluster.

English
Navigation View : This displays digital speed, indicators from speed view along with Turn-by-Turn Navigation information in some vehicles. The compass heading is displayed when navigation routing is not active.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Alerts shown in the instrument cluster may also be displayed in any HUD view.

114 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

display. Shift immediately if the lights are flashing. See Manual Mode (Electronic Shifter) 0 177 or Manual Mode (Mechanical Shifter) 0 176.

Metric

Care of the HUD
Clean the inside of the windshield to remove any dirt or film that could reduce the sharpness or clarity of the HUD image.

English
Performance View : This displays digital speed, indicators from speed view along with rpm reading, transmission positions, Shift Timing Light Position (CT4-V only), and gear shift indicator (if equipped).
The shift timing lights at the top of the display will appear with increases in engine rpm. The rows of lights get closer together as the shift point gets closer. Shift the transmission before the lights come together in the

Clean the HUD lens with a soft cloth sprayed with glass cleaner. Wipe the lens gently, then dry it.
HUD Troubleshooting
If you cannot see the HUD image when the ignition is on, check that:
. Nothing is covering the HUD lens.
. The HUD brightness setting is not too dim or too bright.
. The HUD is adjusted to the proper height.
. Polarized sunglasses are not worn.
. The windshield and HUD lens are clean.

If the HUD image is not correct, contact your dealer.
The windshield is part of the HUD system. If windshield replacement is required, see Windshield Replacement 0 257.

Vehicle Messages
Messages displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) indicate the status of the vehicle or some action that may be needed to correct a condition. Multiple messages may appear one after another.
The messages that do not require immediate action can be acknowledged and cleared by pressing the thumbwheel. The messages that require immediate action cannot be cleared until that action is performed.
All messages should be taken seriously; clearing the message does not correct the problem.
If a SERVICE message appears, see your dealer.
Follow the instructions given in the messages. The system displays messages regarding the following topics:
. Service Messages
. Fluid Levels
. Vehicle Security
. Brakes

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 115

. Steering . Ride Control Systems . Driver Assistance Systems . Cruise Control . Lighting and Bulb Replacement . Wiper/Washer Systems

reduced the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven while this message is on, but maximum acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on, or displays repeatedly, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer for service as soon as possible.

. Doors and Windows . Seat Belts . Airbag Systems

Under certain operating conditions, propulsion will be disabled. Try restarting after the vehicle has been off for two minutes.

. Engine and Transmission
. Tire Pressure
. Battery
Engine Power Messages
Reduced Acceleration Drive with Care
This message displays when the vehicle's propulsion power is reduced. A reduction in propulsion power can affect the vehicle's ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no observed reduction in performance, proceed to your destination. The performance may be

Vehicle Speed Messages
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX KM/ H (MPH)
This message shows that the vehicle speed has been limited to the speed displayed. The limited speed is a protection for various propulsion and vehicle systems, such as lubrication, thermal, brakes, suspension, Teen Driver if equipped, or tires.

116 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Vehicle Personalization
The following are all possible vehicle personalization features. Depending on the vehicle, some may not be available.
For System, Apps, and Personal features and functions, see "Settings" in the infotainment manual.
To access the vehicle personalization menu:
1. Touch the Settings icon on the Home Page of the infotainment display.
2. Touch Vehicle to display a list of available options.
3. Touch to select the desired feature setting.
4. Touch 9 or R to turn a feature
off or on.
5. Touch z to go to the top level of
the Settings menu.
The menu may contain the following:

Rear Seat Reminder
This allows for a chime and a message when the rear door has been opened before or during operation of the vehicle.
Touch Off or On.
My Mode
Touch and the following may display: . Engine Sound . Steering . Suspension . Brake Response
Engine Sound
This setting adjusts the sound of the engine exhaust from a quiet to a loud exhaust volume.
Touch Tour, Sport, or Track.
Steering
This setting adjusts how the steering feels from a lighter to a reduced assist for more steering feel.

Touch Tour, Sport, or Track.

Suspension
This setting adjusts the suspension from a comfortable to a more responsive tune.
Touch Tour, Sport, or Track.
Brake Response
This setting adjusts the brake pedal response for specific driving conditions or style.
Touch Tour, Sport, or Track.
Climate and Air Quality
Touch and the following may display: . Auto Fan Speed . Air Quality Sensor . Auto Cooled Seats . Auto Heated Seats . Auto Defog . Auto Rear Defog . Ionizer
Auto Fan Speed
This setting specifies the amount of airflow when the climate control fan setting is Auto Fan.

Touch Low, Medium, or High.
Air Quality Sensor
This setting switches the system into Recirculation Mode based on the quality of the outside air.
Touch Off, Low Sensitivity, or High Sensitivity.
Auto Cooled Seats
This setting automatically turns on and regulates the ventilated seats when the cabin temperature is warm. See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 40.
Touch Off or On.
Auto Heated Seats
This setting automatically turns on and regulates the heated seats when the cabin temperature is cool. The auto heated seats can be turned off by using the heated seat buttons on the center stack. See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 40.
If equipped with auto heated steering wheel, this feature will turn on when the auto heated seats turn on.
Touch Off or On.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 117

Auto Defog

. Lane Change Alert

This setting automatically turns the front defogger on when the engine is started.
Touch Off or On.
Auto Rear Defog
This setting automatically turns the rear defogger on when the engine is started.
Touch Off or On.
Ionizer
If equipped and on, this feature helps clean the air inside the vehicle and remove contaminants such as pollen, odors, and dust. See Dual Automatic Climate Control System 0 134.
Touch Off or On.
Collision / Detection Systems
Touch and the following may display: . Alert Type . Forward Collision System . Front Pedestrian Detection . Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

. Rear Camera Park Assist Symbols
. Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Alert Type
This setting specifies the type of vehicle feedback provided, either a beep or seat vibration, when you are in danger of colliding with an object.
Touch Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.
Forward Collision System
This setting controls the vehicle response when detecting a vehicle ahead of you. The Off setting disables all FCA and AEB functions. With the Alert and Brake setting, both FCA and AEB are available. The Alert setting disables AEB. See Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) 0 213.
Touch Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake.
Front Pedestrian Detection
This feature may help avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes with nearby pedestrians.
See Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System 0 214.

118 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Touch Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier
This setting determines if an alert will appear when Adaptive Cruise Control brings the vehicle to a complete stop and the vehicle ahead of you starts moving again. See Adaptive Cruise Control 0 194.
Touch Off or On.
Lane Change Alert
This setting specifies if an alert will display on the outside mirror to help you avoid crashing into a vehicle in your blind spot, or rapidly approaching your blind spot, during a lane change maneuver. See Lane Change Alert (LCA) 0 217.
Touch Off or On.
Rear Camera Park Assist Symbols
This setting enables the Rear Camera Park Assist Symbols. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 204.
Touch Off or On.

This setting specifies if an alert will display when the vehicle detects approaching rear cross traffic when in R (Reverse). See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 204.
Touch Off or On.
Comfort and Convenience
Touch and the following may display:
. Chime Volume
. Reverse Tilt Mirror
. Remote Mirror Folding
. Rain Sense Wipers
Chime Volume
This setting determines the chime volume level.
Touch the controls on the infotainment display to adjust the volume.
Reverse Tilt Mirror
When on, both the driver and passenger, driver, or passenger outside mirrors will tilt downward when the vehicle is shifted to R (Reverse) to

improve visibility of the ground near the rear wheels. They will return to their previous driving position when the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) or the engine is turned off. See Reverse Tilt Mirrors 0 27.
Touch Off, On - Driver and Passenger, On - Driver, or On - Passenger.
Remote Mirror Folding
This setting adjusts the outside mirrors when locking and unlocking
the vehicle. Press Q on the remote key
or lock button on the door handle to
fold the mirrors in. Press K on the
remote key or unlock button on the door handle to unfold the mirrors. See Folding Mirrors 0 26.
Touch Off or On.
Rain Sense Wipers
This setting automatically turns on the wipers when moisture is detected and the wiper switch is in intermittent mode.
Touch Disabled or Enabled.

Lighting
Touch and the following may display: . Vehicle Locator Lights . Exit Lighting
Vehicle Locator Lights
This setting flashes the vehicle's
headlamps when K is pressed on the
remote key.
Touch Off or On.
Exit Lighting
This setting specifies how long the headlamps stay on after the vehicle is turned off and exited.
Touch Off, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds, or 120 Seconds.
Power Door Locks
Touch and the following may display: . Auto Door Unlock . Delayed Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
This setting allows selection of which doors will automatically unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 119

Touch Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.

Touch Off or Flash Lights.

Delayed Door Lock

Remote Lock Feedback

This setting delays the locking of the vehicle's doors.
Touch Off or On.
Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
Touch and the following may display: . Remote Unlock Light Feedback . Remote Lock Feedback . Remote Door Unlock . Remote Start Auto Cool Seats . Remote Start Auto Heat Seats . Remote Window Operation . Passive Door Unlock . Passive Door Lock . Remote Left in Vehicle Alert . Remote Removed from Vehicle
Alert
Remote Unlock Light Feedback
This setting flashes the exterior lamps when the vehicle is unlocked with the remote key.

This setting specifies how the vehicle responds when the vehicle is locked with the remote key.
Touch Off, Lights and Horn, Lights Only, or Horn Only.
Remote Door Unlock
This setting specifies whether all doors, or just the driver door, unlock
when pressing K on the remote key.
Touch All Doors or Driver Door.
Remote Start Auto Cool Seats
This setting automatically turns on the ventilated seats when using the remote start function on warm days. See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 40 and Remote Vehicle Start 0 14.
Touch Off or On.
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
This setting automatically turns on the heated seats when using the remote start function on cold days.

120 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 40 and Remote Vehicle Start 0 14.
If equipped with auto heated steering wheel, this feature will turn on when the remote start auto heated seats turn on.
Touch Off or On.
Remote Window Operation
If equipped, this feature enables remote open operation of the windows with the remote key. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8.
Touch Off or On.
Passive Door Unlock
This setting specifies which doors unlock when using the button on the driver door handle to unlock the vehicle.
Touch Off, All Doors or Driver Door Only.

closed, and you walk away from the vehicle with the remote key. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8.
Touch Off, On with Horn Chirp, or On.
Remote Left in Vehicle Alert
This feature sounds an alert when the remote key is left in the vehicle.
Touch Off or On.
Remote Removed from Vehicle Alert
This feature beeps the horn 3 times when exiting a running vehicle with the remote key.
Touch Off or On.
Seating Position
Touch and the following may display: . Seat Entry Memory . Seat Exit Memory
Seat Entry Memory

Passive Door Lock
This setting specifies if the vehicle will automatically lock, or lock and provide an alert after all the doors are

This feature automatically recalls the previously stored 1 or 2 button positions when the ignition is changed from off to on. See Memory Seats 0 37.

Touch On or Off.
Seat Exit Memory
This feature automatically recalls the previously stored exit button positions when the ignition is changed from on to off if the driver door is open or opened. See Memory Seats 0 37.
Touch Off or On.
Teen Driver
See "Teen Driver" under "Settings" in the infotainment manual.
Valet Mode
This will lock the infotainment system and steering wheel controls. It may also limit access to vehicle storage locations, if equipped.
To enable valet mode:
1. Enter a four-digit code on the keypad.
2. Touch Enter to go to the confirmation screen.
3. Re-enter the four-digit code.

Touch Lock or Unlock to lock or unlock the system. Touch Back to go back to the previous menu.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 121

Universal Remote System

instructions refer to a garage door opener, but can be used for other devices.

See Radio Frequency Statement 0 331.
Universal Remote System Programming

Do not use the Universal Remote system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read these instructions completely before programming the Universal Remote system. It may help to have another person assist with the programming process.

If equipped, these buttons are in the overhead console.
This system can replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. These

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming. Erase the programming when vehicle ownership is terminated. See "Erasing Universal Remote System Buttons" later in this section.
To program a garage door opener, park outside directly in line with and facing the garage door opener receiver. Clear all people and objects near the garage door.

122 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Make sure the hand-held transmitter has a new battery for quick and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Programming the Universal Remote System
For questions or programming help, see www.homelink.com/gm or call 1-800-355-3515. For calls placed outside the U.S., Canada, or Puerto Rico, international rates will apply and may differ based on landline or mobile phone.
Programming involves time-sensitive actions, and may time out causing the procedure to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
1. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to 3 in) away from the Universal Remote system buttons with the indicator light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied by the manufacturer of the garage door opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press and hold both the hand-held transmitter button and one of the three Universal Remote system buttons to be used to operate the garage door. Do not release either button until the indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash. Then release both buttons.
Some garage door openers may require substitution of Step 2 with the procedure under "Radio Signals for Some Gate Operators" later in this section.
3. Press and hold the newly programmed Universal Remote system button for five seconds while watching the indicator light and garage door activation.
. If the indicator light stays on continuously or the garage door moves when the button is pressed, then programming is complete. There is no need to complete Steps 4­6.
. If the indicator light does not come on or the garage door does not move, a second button press may be

required. For a second time, press and hold the newly programmed button for five seconds. If the light stays on or the garage door moves, programming is complete. . If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, then changes to a solid light and the garage door does not move, continue with programming Steps 4­6.
Learn or Smart Button
4. After completing Steps 1­3, locate the Learn or Smart button inside garage on the garage door opener receiver. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn or Smart button. Step 6 must be completed within 30 seconds of pressing this button.
6. Inside the vehicle, press and hold the newly programmed Universal Remote system button for two seconds and then release it. If the garage door does not move or the lamp on the garage door opener receiver does not flash, press and hold the same button a second time for two seconds, then release it. Again, if the door does not move or the garage door lamp does not flash, press and hold the same button a third time for two seconds, then release it.
The Universal Remote system should now activate the garage door.
Repeat the process for programming the two remaining buttons.
Radio Signals for Some Gate Operators
For questions or programming help, see www.homelink.com/gm or call 1-800-355-3515. For calls placed

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 123

outside the U.S., Canada, or Puerto Rico, international rates will apply and may differ based on landline or mobile phone.
Some gate operators and radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission. This may not be long enough for the Universal Remote system to pick up the signal during programming.
If the programming did not work, replace Step 2 under "Programming the Universal Remote System" with the following:
Press and hold the Universal Remote system button while pressing and releasing the hand-held transmitter button every two seconds until the signal has been successfully accepted by the Universal Remote system. The Universal Remote system indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under "Programming the Universal Remote System" to complete.

Universal Remote System Operation
Using the Universal Remote System
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Remote system button for at least one-half second. The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Remote System Buttons
Erase all programmed buttons when vehicle ownership is terminated.
To erase:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash. This should take about 10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Reprogramming a Single Universal Remote System Button

To reprogram any of the system buttons:

124 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. Press and hold any one of the buttons. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 1 under "Programming the Universal Remote System."

Lighting
Exterior Lighting Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . . 125 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 127 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Automatic Headlamp System . . . 128 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . 128 Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Cornering Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Interior Lighting Instrument Panel Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Lighting Features Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Battery Load Management . . . . . . 131 Battery Power Protection . . . . . . . . 132

Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

LIGHTING 125
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on the turn signal lever.
Turn the control to the following positions:
O : Turns the exterior lamps off and
deactivates the AUTO mode. Turn to
O again to reactivate the AUTO mode.
In Canada, the headlamps will automatically reactivate when the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
AUTO : Automatically turns the exterior lamps on and off, depending on outside lighting.

126 LIGHTING
; : Turns on the parking lamps
including all lamps, except the headlamps.
2 : Turns on the headlamps together
with the parking lamps and instrument panel lights.
IntelliBeam System
If equipped, this system turns the vehicle's high-beam headlamps on and off according to surrounding traffic conditions.
The system turns the high-beam headlamps on when it is dark enough and there is no other traffic present.
This light b comes on in the
instrument cluster when the IntelliBeam system is enabled.

Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam
To enable the IntelliBeam system,
press b on the turn signal lever
when it is dark outside and the exterior lamp control is in AUTO
or 2.
The blue high-beam on light appears on the instrument cluster when the high beams are on. Driving with IntelliBeam The system only activates the high beams when driving over 40 km/h (25 mph). There is a sensor near the top center of the windshield that automatically controls the system. Keep this area of the windshield clear of debris to allow for best system performance.

The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the automatic control, until one of the following situations occurs:
. The system detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps.
. The system detects a preceding vehicle's taillamps.
. The outside light is bright enough that high-beam headlamps are not required.
. The vehicle's speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph).
. The IntelliBeam system is disabled by the button on the turn signal lever. If this happens, press
b on the turn signal lever when
the exterior lamp control is in the
AUTO or 2 position to reactivate
the IntelliBeam system. The instrument cluster light will come on to indicate the IntelliBeam system is reactivated.
The high beams may not turn off automatically if the system cannot detect another vehicle's lamps because of any of the following:

. The other vehicle's lamps are missing, damaged, obstructed from view, or otherwise undetected.
. The other vehicle's lamps are covered with dirt, snow, and/or road spray.
. The other vehicle's lamps cannot be detected due to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray, mist, or other airborne obstructions.
. The vehicle's windshield is dirty, cracked, or obstructed by something that blocks the view of the light sensor.
. The vehicle is loaded such that the front end points upward, causing the light sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and taillamps.
. The vehicle is being driven on winding or hilly roads.
The automatic high-beam headlamps may need to be disabled if any of the above conditions exist.

Exterior Lamps Off Reminder
A warning chime sounds if the driver door is opened while the ignition is off and the exterior lamps are on.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 3 : Push the turn signal lever away
from you and release, to turn the high beams on. To return to low beams, push the lever again or pull it toward you and release.
This indicator light turns on in the instrument cluster when the high-beam headlamps are on.
Flash-to-Pass
To flash the high beams, pull the turn signal lever toward you, and release.

LIGHTING 127
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. Fully functional DRL are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
If equipped, the DRL will come on when all of the following conditions are met:
. The ignition is on.
. The exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
. The light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL are on, the taillamps, sidemarker lamps, and other lamps will not be on.
The DRL turn off when the headlamps
are turned to O or the ignition is off.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the DRL can only be turned off when the vehicle is parked.

128 LIGHTING Automatic Headlamp System
When the exterior lamp control is set to AUTO and it is dark enough outside, the headlamps come on automatically.
The light sensor is on top of the instrument panel or on the windshield near the rearview mirror. Do not cover the sensor, otherwise the headlamps will come on when they are not needed. The system may also turn on the headlamps when driving through a parking garage or tunnel.

If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp system comes on immediately. If it is light outside when the vehicle leaves the garage, there is a slight delay before the automatic headlamp system turns off the headlamps. During that delay, the instrument cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel Illumination Control 0 129.
When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will turn off.
The automatic headlamp system turns off when the exterior lamp control is
turned to O or the ignition is off. For
vehicles sold in Canada, this control only works when the transmission is in P (Park).
Lights On with Wipers
If the windshield wipers are activated in daylight with the engine on, and the exterior lamp control is in AUTO, the headlamps, parking lamps, and other exterior lamps come on. The transition time for the lamps coming

on varies based on wiper speed. When the wipers are not operating, these lamps turn off. Move the exterior
lamp control to O or ; to disable
this feature.
Hazard Warning Flashers
| : Press this button to make the
front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Release the button for at least one second and press again to turn the flashers off. The hazard warning flashers turn on automatically if the airbags deploy.

Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn. An arrow on the instrument cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change is completed. If the lever is briefly pressed and released, the turn signal flashes three times. The turn and lane-change signal can be turned off manually by moving the lever back to its original position.

If after signaling a turn or lane change, the arrow flashes rapidly or does not come on, a signal function may be inoperative. This vehicle may be equipped with LED lighting. For replacement of any LED lighting, contact your dealer.
Cornering Lamps
If equipped with cornering lamps, they automatically come on when all of the following occur:
. The low-beam headlamps are on.
. The turn signals are activated or the steering wheel is at a turning angle.
. The vehicle speed is below 40 km/h (25 mph) .

LIGHTING 129
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination Control
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting, indicators, and switch backlighting can be adjusted.
D : Move the thumbwheel up or
down to brighten or dim the lights. The brightness of the displays and indicators automatically adjusts based on outdoor lighting. The instrument panel illumination control will set the

130 LIGHTING
lowest level to which the displays and indicators will automatically be adjusted.
Courtesy Lamps
The courtesy lamps come on when any door is opened, the remote key unlock is pressed, or in transition to OFF power mode unless the dome lamp override is activated. To deactivate the dome lamp override,
press j OFF and the indicator light
on the button will turn off.
Dome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are in the overhead console.
To operate, press the following buttons:
j OFF : Press to turn off the dome
lamps when a door is open. An indicator light on the button will turn on when the dome lamp override is
activated. Press j OFF again to
deactivate this feature and the indicator light will turn off. The dome lamps will come on when any door is opened, the remote key unlock is pressed, or in transition to OFF power mode.
+ ON/OFF : Press to turn the dome lamps on and off manually.
Reading Lamps
There are front and rear reading lamps on the overhead console and over the rear passenger doors. These lamps will come on when any door is opened, the remote key unlock is pressed, or in transition to OFF power mode.
To manually turn the reading lamps on or off:

Press the lamp lenses on the front reading lamps.
Press the lamp lenses over the rear passenger doors.

Lighting Features
Entry Lighting
Some exterior lamps and most of the interior lights turn on briefly at night,
or in areas of limited lighting when K
is pressed on the remote key. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8. When the driver door is opened, all control lights, Driver Information Center (DIC) lights, and door pocket lights turn on. After about 30 seconds the exterior lamps turn off, then the remaining interior lights dim to off. Entry lighting can be disabled manually by changing the ignition out of the OFF position, or by
pressing Q on the remote key.
This feature can be changed. See "Vehicle Locator Lights" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116.

Entry Lighting with Approach Detection
If equipped with approach detection, the entry lighting feature will automatically turn on when the remote key is detected within approximately 2 m (6 ft) of the vehicle.
If the vehicle has remained parked for an extended period of time with no remote key use or Keyless Access operation, approach detection will be disabled. To reactivate, press any button on the remote key or open and close all vehicle doors to re-enable the entry lighting feature on approach.
Approach detection will not work if:
. The vehicle battery is low.
. The ignition is on or in ACC/ ACCESSORY.
. Entry lighting is set to Off. See "Vehicle Locator Lights" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
Approach detection will not work with a single remote key if:
. The remote key is left within a 5 m (16 ft) range of the vehicle for several minutes

LIGHTING 131
. The remote key is left inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed
To help maximize remote key battery life, do not store the remote key within 5 m (16 ft) of the vehicle.
Exit Lighting
Some exterior lamps and interior lights come on at night, or in areas with limited lighting, when the driver door is opened after the ignition is turned off. The dome lamp comes on after the ignition is turned off. The exterior lamps and dome lamp remain on for a set amount of time, then automatically turn off.
The exterior lamps turn off immediately by turning the exterior lamp control off.
This feature can be changed. See Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
Battery Load Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM), which estimates the battery's temperature and state of

132 LIGHTING
charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery.
When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the driver. If so, a DIC message might be displayed. If a battery message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 109.
Battery Power Protection
The battery saver feature is designed to protect the vehicle's battery.
If some interior lamps are left on and the ignition is turned off, the battery rundown protection system automatically turns the lamp off after some time.

Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
The exterior lamps turn off about 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off, if the parking lamps or headlamps have been manually left on. This protects against draining the battery. To restart the 10-minute timer, turn
the exterior lamp control to the O position and then back to the ; or 2 position.
To keep the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, the ignition must be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY.

Infotainment System Introduction

INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM 133

Introduction Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Infotainment
See the infotainment manual for information on the radio, audio players, phone, navigation system, and voice or speech recognition. It also includes information on settings.
Active Noise Cancellation (ANC)
If equipped, ANC reduces engine noise in the vehicle's interior. ANC requires the factory-installed audio system, radio, speakers, amplifier (if equipped), induction system, and exhaust system to work properly. Deactivation is required by your dealer if related aftermarket equipment is installed.

134 CLIMATE CONTROLS
Climate Controls
Climate Control Systems Dual Automatic Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Air Vents Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Maintenance Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
The climate control buttons on the center stack and on the climate control display are used to adjust the heating, cooling, and ventilation system.

Center Stack Climate Controls

1. ON/OFF (Power) 2. AUTO (Automatic Operation) 3. Air Delivery Mode Control 4. Driver Temperature Controls 5. Fan Control 6. Passenger Temperature Controls 7. A/C (Air Conditioning)

8. Recirculation
9. SYNC (Synchronized Temperature)
10. Defrost
11. Rear Window Defogger

Climate Control Display
1. Driver and Passenger Temperature Displays
2. Fan Control 3. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls 4. Sync (Synchronized
Temperature) 5. Recirculation 6. Air Delivery Mode Control 7. Auto (Automatic Operation) 8. A/C (Air Conditioning) 9. On/Off (Power)

The fan speed, air delivery mode, air conditioning, driver and passenger temperatures, and Sync settings can be controlled by touching CLIMATE icon on the infotainment Home Page or the climate button in the application tray. A selection can then be made on the front climate control page displayed. See the infotainment manual.
Climate Control Status Display The climate control status display appears briefly when the center stack climate controls are adjusted.

CLIMATE CONTROLS 135
Climate Control Influence on Fuel Economy
The climate control system depends on other vehicle systems for heat and power input. Certain climate control settings can lead to higher fuel usage.
The following climate control settings use more fuel:
. MAX air conditioning mode
. Defrost mode
. Extreme temperature settings, such as 15° C (60° F) or 32° C (90° F)
. High fan speed settings
To help reduce fuel usage:
. Use the full automatic control as described under "Automatic Operation."
. Select a temperature setting that is higher in hot weather and lower in cold weather.
. Turn off the air conditioning when it is not needed.
. Only use defrost to clear the windows.

136 CLIMATE CONTROLS
Automatic Operation
The system automatically controls the following four functions to heat or cool the vehicle to the desired temperature:
. Fan Speed
. Air Delivery Mode
. Air Conditioning
. Recirculation
When the AUTO indicator light is lit, all four functions are operating automatically. Each function can be manually set and the selected setting will be shown. This cancels full automatic operation and the AUTO indicator light turns off. Functions that are not manually set will continue to be automatically controlled, although the AUTO indicator light will not be lit.
To place the system in automatic mode:
1. Press AUTO.
2. Set the driver and passenger temperature.

To find your comfort setting, start with 22 °C (72 °F) and allow the system time to stabilize. Then adjust the temperature as needed for best comfort.
To improve fuel efficiency and to cool the vehicle faster, recirculation may be automatically selected in warm weather.
The recirculation light will not come on when automatically controlled.
Press @ to manually select
recirculation; press it again to select outside air.
Do not cover the solar sensor on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load. See "Sensors" later in this section.
Manual Operation
On/Off : Press to turn the climate control system on or off. When the system is off, outside air will be prevented from entering the vehicle. When the system is on or a button is pressed, the climate control system will turn on and deliver airflow per the current setting.

9 : Press button up or down to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Control : The temperature can be adjusted separately for the driver and passenger.
Press button up or down to increase or decrease the driver or passenger temperature setting.
The driver side or passenger side temperature display shows the temperature setting increasing or decreasing.
SYNC : Press to link the passenger and rear climate temperature settings, if equipped, to the driver setting. The SYNC indicator light will turn on. When the passenger or rear climate temperature settings are adjusted, the SYNC indicator light is off.
Air Delivery Mode Control : Press Y, [ , or z to change the direction of
the airflow. An indicator light comes

on in the selected mode button. Multiple buttons can be selected simultaneously.
Changing the mode cancels the automatic operation and the system goes into manual mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
z : This mode clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield and side window vents. The system automatically forces outside air into the vehicle and the air conditioning compressor will run, unless the outside temperature is close to freezing.
Y : Air is directed to the instrument
panel outlets.
[ : Air is directed to the floor
outlets, with some to the windshield, side window outlets, and second row floor outlets.
0 : Press to clear the windshield of
fog or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield and the side window vents. The air

conditioning compressor also comes on, unless the outside temperature is below freezing.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
See Air Vents 0 139.
A/C : Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning is enabled. If the fan is turned off, the air conditioner will not run. The A/C light will stay on even if the outside temperatures are below freezing.
@ : Press to turn on recirculation.
An indicator light comes on. Air is recirculated to quickly cool the inside of the vehicle. It can also be used to help reduce outside air and odors that enter the vehicle. The air conditioning compressor also comes on when this mode is activated.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window.

CLIMATE CONTROLS 137
K : Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light on the button comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on.
The rear window defogger only works when the ignition is on. The defogger turns off if the ignition is turned to off or ACC/ACCESSORY.
Caution
Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window can damage the rear window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp objects.
Heated Mirror : If equipped with heated outside mirrors, the mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed. See Heated Mirrors 0 27.
Remote Start Climate Control Operation : If equipped with remote start, the climate control system may

138 CLIMATE CONTROLS
run when the vehicle is started remotely. The rear defog may come on during remote start based on cold ambient conditions. The rear defog indicator light does not come on during a remote start.
If equipped, the heated seats will turn on if it is cold outside or the ventilated seats will turn on if it is hot outside. The heated and ventilated seat indicator lights may not come on during a remote start. If equipped, the heated steering wheel will come on in a remote start if it is cold outside. The heated steering wheel indicator light may not come on.
Ionizer : If equipped with an ionizer, this feature helps to clean the air inside the vehicle and remove contaminants such as pollen, odors, and dust. If the climate control system is on and the ionizer is enabled, the ionizer status indicator will be lit on the climate control display. To turn the ionizer on or off, see Climate and Air Quality under Vehicle Personalization 0 116.

Sensors
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille in the middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solar heat. Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not work properly. There is also an exterior temperature sensor behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle, could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature.

The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain comfort settings by adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and air delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures.

Air Vents
Adjustable air vents are in the center and on the sides of the instrument panel, and on the rear of the center console storage. Move the slider knobs to change the direction of or to close off the airflow. Operation Tips . Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves
from air inlets at the base of the windshield that could block the flow of air into the vehicle.

. Clear snow off the hood to improve visibility and help decrease moisture drawn into the vehicle.
. Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more effectively.
. Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
. Do not attach any devices to the air vent slats. This restricts airflow and may cause damage to the air vents.

CLIMATE CONTROLS 139
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The filter reduces dust, pollen, and other airborne irritants from outside air that is pulled into the vehicle. The filter should be replaced as part of routine scheduled maintenance. See Maintenance Schedule 0 303.
See your dealer regarding replacement of the filter.
Service
All vehicles have a label underhood that identifies the refrigerant used in the vehicle. The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. The air conditioning evaporator should never be repaired or replaced by one from a salvage vehicle. It should only be replaced by a new evaporator to ensure proper and safe operation.
During service, all refrigerants should be reclaimed with proper equipment. Venting refrigerants directly to the

140 CLIMATE CONTROLS
atmosphere is harmful to the environment and may also create unsafe conditions based on inhalation, combustion, frostbite, or other health-based concerns.
The air conditioning system requires periodic maintenance. See Maintenance Schedule 0 303.

Driving and Operating
Driving Information Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Track Events and Competitive Driving (V-Series Only) . . . . . . . . . 146 Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 151 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Starting and Operating New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Composite Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

DRIVING AND OPERATING 141

Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Shifting Into Park (Electronic
Shifter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Shifting Into Park (Mechanical
Shifter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Shifting out of Park (Mechanical
Shifter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Shifting out of Park (Electronic
Shifter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Parking over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Active Fuel Management . . . . . . . . 167 Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Engine Exhaust Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission (Mechanical Shifter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Automatic Transmission (Electronic shifter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Manual Mode (Mechanical Shifter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Manual Mode (Electronic Shifter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Drive Systems All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Brakes Electric Brake Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . 179 Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Ride Control Systems Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . . . 189 Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . 191
Cruise Control Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . 194
Driver Assistance Systems Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . . . 203 Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Rear Pedestrian Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Assistance Systems for Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

142 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . 217 Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . 217 Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . 219

Conversions and Add-Ons Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . 231

Fuel Top Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Recommended Fuel (LSY 2.0L L4 Turbo Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Recommended Fuel (L3B 2.7L L4 Turbo Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . 222 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Trailer Towing General Towing Information . . . . 225 Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Driving Information
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible:
. Set the climate controls to the desired temperature after the engine is started, or turn them off when not required.
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
. Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
. Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
. When road and weather conditions are appropriate, use cruise control.
. Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require.
. Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.

. Combine several trips into a single trip.
. Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near the size.
. Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
Distracted Driving
Distraction comes in many forms and can take your focus from the task of driving. Exercise good judgment and do not let other activities divert your attention away from the road. Many local governments have enacted laws regarding driver distraction. Become familiar with the local laws in your area.
To avoid distracted driving, keep your eyes on the road, keep your hands on the steering wheel, and focus your attention on driving.
. Do not use a phone in demanding driving situations. Use a hands-free method to place or receive necessary phone calls.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 143

. Watch the road. Do not read, take notes, or look up information on phones or other electronic devices.
. Designate a front seat passenger to handle potential distractions.
. Become familiar with vehicle features before driving, such as programming favorite radio stations and adjusting climate control and seat settings. Program all trip information into any navigation device prior to driving.
. Wait until the vehicle is parked to retrieve items that have fallen to the floor.
. Stop or park the vehicle to tend to children.
. Keep pets in an appropriate carrier or restraint.
. Avoid stressful conversations while driving, whether with a passenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning
Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often could cause a crash resulting in injury or death. Focus your attention on driving.
Refer to the infotainment manual for more information on using that system and the navigation system, if equipped, including pairing and using a cell phone.
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means "always expect the unexpected." The first step in driving defensively is to wear the seat belt. See Seat Belts 0 44.
. Assume that other road users (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they may do and be ready.

. Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

144 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Drunk Driving

Braking

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy.
{ Warning
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink.

Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average driver reaction time is about three-quarters of a second. In that time, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft), which could be a lot of distance in an emergency.
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind include:
. Keep enough distance between you and the vehicle in front of you.
. Avoid needless heavy braking.
. Keep pace with traffic.

Control of a Vehicle
Braking, steering, and accelerating are important factors in helping to control a vehicle while driving.

If the engine ever stops or a brake fault occurs, the brakes may lose power assist. More effort will be required to stop the vehicle and it can take longer to stop.

Steering
Caution
To avoid damage to the steering system, do not drive over curbs, parking barriers, or similar objects at speeds greater than 3 km/h (1 mph). Use care when driving over other objects such as lane dividers and speed bumps. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not covered by the vehicle warranty.

Electric Power Steering
The vehicle has electric power steering. It does not have power steering fluid. Regular maintenance is not required.
If power steering assist is lost due to a system malfunction, the vehicle can be steered, but may require increased effort.
If the steering assist is used for an extended period of time while the vehicle is not moving, power assist may be reduced.
If the steering wheel is turned until it reaches the end of its travel and is held against that position for an extended period of time, power steering assist may be reduced.
Normal use of the power steering assist should return when the system cools down.
See your dealer if there is a problem.
Curve Tips
. Take curves at a reasonable speed.
. Reduce speed before entering a curve.

. Maintain a reasonable steady speed through the curve.
. Wait until the vehicle is out of the curve before accelerating gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
. There are some situations when steering around a problem may be more effective than braking.
. Holding both sides of the steering wheel allows you to turn 180 degrees without removing a hand.
. The Antilock Brake System (ABS) allows steering while braking.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 145 Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. Follow these tips: 1. Ease off the accelerator and then,
if there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle so that it straddles the edge of the pavement. 2. Turn the steering wheel about one-eighth of a turn, until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. 3. Turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

146 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Loss of Control
Skidding
There are three types of skids that correspond to the vehicle's three control systems:
. Braking Skid -- wheels are not rolling.
. Steering or Cornering Skid -- too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
. Acceleration Skid -- too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible.

. Slow down and adjust your driving according to weather conditions. Stopping distance can be longer and vehicle control can be affected when traction is reduced by water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material on the road. Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface -- and slow down when you have any doubt.
. Try to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the braking skid.

If the vehicle starts to slide, follow these suggestions:

. Ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and steer the way you want the vehicle to go. The vehicle may straighten out. Be ready for a second skid if it occurs.

Track Events and Competitive Driving (V-Series Only)
{ Danger
High-performance features are intended for use only on closed tracks by experienced and qualified drivers and should not be used on public roads. High-speed driving, aggressive cornering, hard braking, and other high-performance driving can be dangerous. Improper driver inputs for the conditions may result in loss of control of the vehicle, which could injure or kill you or others. Always drive safely.
Track events and competitive driving may affect the vehicle warranty. See the warranty manual before using the vehicle for competitive driving.

{ Warning
Prior to each track event and again before returning to public roads, tighten the wheel nuts with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification. Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off, resulting in a crash. See Capacities and Specifications 0 318 for wheel nut torque specifications.
Caution
Low oil levels can damage the engine. If using the vehicle for competitive driving, the engine may use more oil than it would with normal use. Check the oil level often during competitive driving.
Competitive Driving Mode can be selected. See Driver Mode Control 0 184.

Axle Fluid
Axles must have 805 km (500 mi) before being used in track driving.
The rear axle fluid temperatures may be higher than when driving in severe conditions. Drain and refill with new fluid after the first racing or competitive driving event, and then after every 24 hours of racing or competitive driving. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 313.
Caution
During a first time track or racing event, high axle temperatures can occur. Damage could be caused to the axle and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not drive as long or as fast the first time the vehicle is driven on the track or raced.
. The axle lubricant should be replaced with new lubricant.
. Additional cooling capacity is also required for continuous competitive driving.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 147
Engine Oil
Check the oil level often during track events and competitive driving and keep the oil level at or near the upper mark.
Fuel
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 93 at a track event. Unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 may be used, but performance will be degraded.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Have the transmission fluid set to the track specific oil level prior to track usage. Transmission fluid should be changed after every 15 hours of track usage. Any transmission level set or change should be performed at your dealer.
Brakes
Brake cooling can be improved if the front brake disc splash shield and front tire deflector are removed. Removing the shield will require that the suspension bushings and wheel

148 DRIVING AND OPERATING

speed wires visible to the brake disc be protected with insulated thermal wrapping.
Caution

If racing brake fluid is in the vehicle and the age of the brake fluid is over a month old or unknown, replace the brake fluid between racing/closed track driving.

Removing the splash shield can degrade wet braking performance, as well as introduce brake pedal pulsation, due to brake disc exposure to road debris. Only remove the front brake disc splash shield and front tire deflector when driving in track events.
Brake Fluid
. Before racing, replace existing brake fluid with a qualified racing brake fluid from a sealed container. Brake fluid with a dry boiling point >279 °C (534 °F) is qualified. If racing brake fluid is used, replace it with GM approved brake fluid before driving on public roads. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 313.
. Do not use silicone-based fluids.

Caution
Failure to change the brake fluid and transfer case fluid after any performance or race track driving could result in damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Have the brake fluid and transfer case fluid changed by your dealer after any performance or race track driving. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 313.
Brake Burnishing
For vehicles equipped with front Brembo brake systems:
Performance/racing brake pads are required prior to racing or closed track driving. Vehicles with option code JE2 have performance brake pads.

New brake pads must be burnished before racing or other competitive driving. These procedures are specific to the V-Series brake package. This procedure should not be performed on other models as damage may result.
Caution
Performing the brake burnish procedure on a base brake system can result in brake damage.
Caution
The new vehicle break-in period should be completed before performing the brake burnish procedure, otherwise damage may occur to the powertrain/engine. See New Vehicle Break-In 0 157.

Caution
Brake fade will occur during this track burnish procedure and can cause brake pedal travel and force to increase. This could extend stopping distance until the brakes are fully burnished.
When this procedure is performed as instructed, it will not damage the brakes. The brake pads will smoke and produce an odor. The braking force and pedal travel may increase. After the procedure, the brake pads may appear white at the rotor contact.
Perform this procedure only on dry pavement, in a safe manner, and in compliance with all local and state ordinances/laws regarding motor vehicle operation.
Brake Burnish Procedure
1. Apply the brakes 25 times starting at 100 km/h (60 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph) while decelerating at 0.4 g. This is a medium brake application. Drive

DRIVING AND OPERATING 149

for at least 1 km (0.6 mi) between applying the brakes. This first step may be skipped if there are more than 320 km (200 mi) on the brake pads.
2. Apply the brakes 25 times starting at 100 km/h (60 mph) to 25 km/h (15 mph) while decelerating at 0.8 g. This is a hard brake application, without activating the Antilock Brake System (ABS). Drive for at least 1 km (0.6 mi) between applications.
3. Cool down: Drive at 100 km/h (60 mph) for approximately 15 km (10 mi) without using the brakes.
4. Apply the brakes 25 times from 100 km/h (60 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph) while decelerating at 0.4 g. This is a medium brake application. Drive for at least 1 km (0.6 mi) between applications.
As with all high performance brake systems, some amount of brake squeal is normal.

Wheel Alignment
Wheel alignment suggested specs for track use:
. Front: -2.0 deg camber, 0.2 deg total toe
. Rear: -1.7 deg camber, 0.2 deg total toe
Vehicles Equipped with the Original Equipment Tires
Follow the requirements and recommendations for tire inflation pressures while driving on various types of tracks/courses. This helps to achieve a well-balanced vehicle and enhance tire traction performance.
Use good judgment to determine the appropriate tire inflation pressure and speeds for the track/course configuration and environmental conditions. Contact the tire manufacturer if further assistance is needed.
To maximize tire life, drive 800 km (500 mi) prior to racetrack driving or complete the minimum track running

150 DRIVING AND OPERATING

that will increase the tire pressures by 35 kPa (5 psi). After this, immediately let the tires cool to cold pressures.
Tire Inflation Pressure Guidelines
Tire inflation pressures affect vehicle handling and tire life, and should be adjusted for various types of tracks/ courses.

{ Warning
Tracks/courses put high loads on tires operating at high speed, which can lead to tire failure if not inflated properly. Always limit vehicle cargo to the driver plus one passenger with no additional cargo.

Inspect the tires prior to every track/ course session. Track/course driving will reduce the tire tread life.
Driving and Operating
{ Warning
Operating the vehicle at high speeds can be dangerous. Improper tire inflation pressure can put additional strain on the tires and can cause a sudden failure. Make sure the tires are in excellent condition, and use the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load and track/course.

{ Warning
Track/course loads wear tires both on the tread and internal to the tire. When driven in track/course conditions, even if tread is not worn down to the treadwear indicator, tires must be replaced after the equivalent of two tanks of fuel or approximately 160 km (100 mi).
Tire Inflation Pressure for Tracks with Sustained High-Speed Operation on Banked Turns
(e.g., Daytona International Speedway, Indianapolis Motor Speedway, or similar)

Inflate tires to a minimum of 300 kPa (44 psi) when cold.
Do not reduce tire inflation pressure when hot.
Tire Inflation Pressure for Tracks with Combined High-Speed and High-Load Corners
(e.g., Nurburgring Nordschliefe, Spa Francorchamps, or similar)
Inflate tires to a minimum of 260 kPa (38 psi) when cold.
Limit vehicle speed to below 230 km/h (143 mph) until 290 kPa (42 psi) is reached.
For continuous track use, hot tire inflation pressure may be adjusted to a minimum of 290 kPa (42 psi).
Tire Inflation Pressure for Road/ Street Courses
(e.g., Virginia International Raceway, Road Atlanta, or similar)
Inflate tires to a minimum of 240 kPa (35 psi) cold.

For continuous road/street course use, hot tire inflation pressure may be adjusted to a minimum of 270 kPa (39 psi).
Return the tires to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure when high-speed driving has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 154 and Tire Pressure 0 275.
Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing water.
{ Warning
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
After driving through a large puddle of water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. Driving through flowing water could cause the vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under the vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When the vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 151
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips include:
. Allow extra following distance.
. Pass with caution.
. Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
. Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
. Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires 0 267.
. Turn off cruise control.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
. Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission.
. Shift to a lower gear when going down steep or long hills.

152 DRIVING AND OPERATING

{ Warning
Using the brakes to slow the vehicle on a long downhill slope can cause brake overheating, can reduce brake performance, and could result in a loss of braking. Shift the transmission to a lower gear to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.

. Be alert on top of hills; something could be in your lane (e.g., stalled car, crash).
. Pay attention to special road signs (e.g., falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice

{ Warning
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. This can cause overheating of the brakes and loss of steering assist. Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear.
. Drive at speeds that keep the vehicle in its own lane. Do not swing wide or cross the center line.

Snow or ice between the tires and the road creates less traction or grip, so drive carefully. Wet ice can occur at about 0 °C (32 °F) when freezing rain begins to fall. Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated.
For Slippery Road Driving:
. Accelerate gently. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick.
. Turn on Traction Control. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 182.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves vehicle stability during hard stops, but the brakes should be applied sooner than when on dry pavement. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) 0 179.
. Allow greater following distance and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice.
. Turn off cruise control.
Blizzard Conditions
Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible, use Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Service 0 325. To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
. Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.

{ Warning
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO), which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in snow:
. Clear snow from the base of the vehicle, especially any blocking the exhaust pipe.
. Open a window about 5 cm (2 in) on the vehicle side that is away from the wind, to bring in fresh air.
. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.
. Adjust the climate control system to circulate the air inside the vehicle and set the
(Continued)

DRIVING AND OPERATING 153

Warning (Continued)
fan speed to the highest setting. See "Climate Control Systems."

If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off and use the rocking method. See Traction Control/ Electronic Stability Control 0 182.

For more information about CO, see Engine Exhaust 0 168.
To save fuel, run the engine for short periods to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and partially close the window. Moving about to keep warm also helps.
If it takes time for help to arrive, when running the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible, to save fuel.
If the Vehicle Is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

{ Warning
If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 56 km/h (35 mph).
Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a low forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator

154 DRIVING AND OPERATING
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing the Vehicle 0 291.
Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how much weight the vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on the vehicle may show how much weight it may properly carry: the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification label.

{ Warning
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles. This could cause loss of control and a crash. Overloading can also reduce stopping distance, damage the tires, and shorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label
Label Example A vehicle-specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle's center pillar (B-pillar). The Tire and Loading Information label shows the number of occupant seating positions (1), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (2) in kilograms and pounds. The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the tire size of the original equipment tires (3)

and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (4). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires 0 267 and Tire Pressure 0 275.
There is also important loading information on the Certification label. It may show the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. See "Certification Label" later in this section.
"Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit­
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 155

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle."

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

See Trailer Towing 0 228 for important information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how

Example 1
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg (300 lbs).

156 DRIVING AND OPERATING
3. Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs).

weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label

Example 2
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg (750 lbs).
3. Available Cargo Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
3. Available Cargo Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information label for specific information about the vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined

Label Example
A vehicle-specific Certification label is attached to the vehicle's center pillar (B-pillar). The label may show the gross weight capacity of the vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

{ Warning
Things inside the vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
. Put things in the cargo area of the vehicle. In the cargo area, put them as far forward as possible. Try to spread the weight evenly.
. Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.
. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in the vehicle.
. Secure loose items in the vehicle.
. Do not leave a seat folded down unless needed.

Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In
Follow these recommended guidelines during the first 2 400 km (1,500 mi) of driving this vehicle. Parts have a break-in period and performance will be better in the long run.
For the first 2 400 km (1,500 mi):
. Avoid full throttle starts and abrupt stops.
. Do not exceed 4000 engine rpm.
. Avoid driving at any one constant speed, fast or slow.
. Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle when the engine speed will exceed 4000 rpm.
. Do not let the engine labor. Never lug the engine in high gear at low speeds.
. Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools, or similar activities during this break-in period.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 157
. Check engine oil with every refueling and add if necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher than normal during the first 2 400 km (1,500 mi).
. To break in new tires, drive at moderate speeds and avoid hard cornering for the first 300 km (200 mi). New tires do not have maximum traction and may tend to slip.
. New brake linings also need a break-in period. Avoid making hard stops during the first 300 km (200 mi). This is recommended every time brake linings are replaced.
Composite Materials
This vehicle may be equipped with parts containing carbon fiber, sheet-molding compound, or other composite materials. Dealer-installed accessories may also contain composite materials.

158 DRIVING AND OPERATING

{ Warning
Exposed edges of parts containing carbon fiber and other composite materials can be sharp. Contact with these parts could result in injury. Use caution to avoid contacting these parts, including when washing the vehicle. If the parts are damaged, replace the parts promptly with replacements from your dealer.

{ Warning
Rear end spoilers may break under pressure, resulting in property damage or injury. Do not push the vehicle by the spoiler or use the spoiler as a handle.
Ignition Positions

{ Warning
Rocker extensions may break under pressure, resulting in property damage or injury. Do not stand on the rocker extension or use it as a step.

The vehicle has an electronic keyless ignition with pushbutton start.
The remote key must be in the vehicle for the system to operate. If the pushbutton start is not working, the

vehicle may be near a strong radio antenna signal causing interference to the Keyless Access system. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8.
To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle must be on, and the brake pedal must be applied.
Stopping the Engine/OFF (No Indicator Lights) : When the vehicle is stopped, press ENGINE START/ STOP once to turn the engine off.
If the vehicle is in P (Park), the ignition will turn off, and Retained Accessory Power (RAP) will remain active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 163.
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), the ignition will return to ACC/ ACCESSORY and display a message in the Driver Information Center (DIC). When the vehicle is shifted into P (Park), the ignition system will switch to OFF.
The vehicle may have an electric steering column lock. The lock is activated when the vehicle is switched to OFF and the driver door is opened.

A sound may be heard as the lock actuates or releases. The steering column lock may not release with the wheels turned off center. If this happens, the vehicle may not start. Move the steering wheel from left to right while attempting to start the vehicle. If this does not work, the vehicle needs service.
Do not turn the engine off when the vehicle is moving. This will cause a loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags.
If the vehicle must be shut off in an emergency:
1. Brake using a firm and steady pressure. Do not pump the brakes repeatedly. This may deplete power assist, requiring increased brake pedal force.
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). This can be done while the vehicle is moving. After shifting to N (Neutral), firmly apply the brakes and steer the vehicle to a safe location.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 159

3. Come to a complete stop, shift to P (Park), and turn the ignition to OFF. On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake 0 179.
{ Warning
Turning off the vehicle while moving may cause loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags. While driving, only shut the vehicle off in an emergency.
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, and must be shut off while driving, press and hold the ENGINE START/ STOP button for longer than two seconds, or press twice in five seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber Indicator Light) : This mode allows you to use some electrical accessories when the engine is off.
With the ignition off, pressing the button one time without the brake pedal applied will place the ignition system in ACC/ACCESSORY.
The ignition will switch from ACC/ ACCESSORY to OFF after five minutes to prevent battery rundown.
ON/RUN/START (Green Indicator Light) : This mode is for driving and starting. With the ignition off, and the brake pedal applied, pressing the button once will place the ignition system in ON/RUN/START. Once engine cranking begins, release the button. Engine cranking will continue until the engine starts. See Starting the Engine 0 160. The vehicle will then remain on.
Service Mode
This power mode is available for service and diagnostics, and to verify the proper operation of the malfunction indicator lamp as may be required for emission inspection

160 DRIVING AND OPERATING

purposes. With the vehicle off, and the brake pedal not applied, pressing and holding the button for more than five seconds will place the vehicle in Service Mode. The instruments and audio systems will operate as they do in ON/RUN, but the vehicle will not be able to be driven. The engine will not start in Service Mode. Press the button again to turn the vehicle off.

Caution
If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 231.

Starting the Engine
Shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral). To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Caution
Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure
1. With the Keyless Access system, the remote key must be in the vehicle. Press ENGINE START/ STOP with the brake pedal applied. When the engine begins cranking, let go of the button.
The idle speed will go down as the engine gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
If the remote key is not in the vehicle, if there is interference, or if the remote key battery is low, a Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a message. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 8.

Caution
Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by trying to start the engine immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to let the cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after five to 10 seconds, especially in very cold weather (below -18 °C or 0 °F), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you press ENGINE START/ STOP. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts, release the accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.

Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Stop/Start System
The Stop/Start system will shut off the engine to help conserve fuel. It has components designed for the increased number of starts.
{ Warning
The automatic engine Stop/Start feature causes the engine to shut off while the vehicle is still on. Do not exit the vehicle before shifting to P (Park). The vehicle may restart and move unexpectedly. Always shift to P (Park), and then turn the ignition off before exiting the vehicle.
Auto Engine Stop/Start
When the brakes are applied and the vehicle is at a complete stop, the engine may turn off. When stopped, the tachometer displays AUTO STOP.

See Tachometer 0 96. When the brake pedal is released or the accelerator pedal is pressed, the engine will restart.
To maintain vehicle performance, other conditions may cause the engine to automatically restart before the brake pedal is released.
Auto Stops may not occur and/or Auto Starts may occur because:
. The climate control settings require the engine to be running to cool or heat the vehicle interior.
. The vehicle battery charge is low.
. The vehicle battery has recently been disconnected.
. Minimum vehicle speed has not been reached since the last Auto Stop.
. The accelerator pedal is pressed.
. The engine or transmission is not at the required operating temperature.
. The outside temperature is not in the required operating range.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 161
. The vehicle transmission is shifted out of D (Drive) to any gear other than P (Park).
. Tow/Haul Mode or other driver modes have been selected.
. The vehicle is on a steep hill or grade.
. The driver door has been opened or the driver seat belt has been unbuckled.
. The hood has been opened.
. The Auto Stop has reached the maximum allowed time.
Auto Stop Disable Switch

162 DRIVING AND OPERATING
The automatic engine Stop/Start feature can be disabled and enabled
by pressing the switch with the h
symbol. Auto Stop is enabled each time you start the vehicle.
When h is illuminated, the system is
enabled.
Engine Heater
Vehicles with the engine heater can use this option in cold weather conditions at or below -18 °C (0 °F) for easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Plug in the engine heater at least four hours before starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine heater operation at temperatures above -18 °C (0 °F).
To Use the Engine Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The cord is clipped to the diagonal brace on the passenger side of the engine compartment.

Check the heater cord for damage. If it is damaged, do not use it. See your dealer for a replacement. Inspect the cord for damage yearly.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{ Warning
Improper use of the heater cord or an extension cord can damage the cord and may result in overheating and fire.
. Plug the cord into a three-prong electrical utility receptacle that is protected by a ground fault detection function. An ungrounded outlet could cause an electric shock.
. Use a weatherproof, heavy-duty, 15 amp-rated extension cord if needed. Failure to use the recommended extension cord in good operating condition,
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
or using a damaged heater or extension cord, could make it overheat and cause a fire, property damage, electric shock, and injury.
. Do not operate the vehicle with the heater cord permanently attached to the vehicle. Possible heater cord and thermostat damage could occur.
. While in use, do not let the heater cord touch vehicle parts or sharp edges. Never close the hood on the heater cord.
. Before starting the vehicle, unplug the cord, reattach the cover to the plug, and securely fasten the cord. Keep the cord away from any moving parts.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be damaged.
Contact your dealer for information on how long to use the heater in your particular area.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
When the ignition is turned from on to off, the following features (if equipped) will continue to function for up to 10 minutes, or until the driver door is opened. These features will also work when the ignition is in RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY:
. Infotainment System
. Power Windows (during RAP this functionality will be lost when any door is opened)
. Sunroof (during RAP this functionality will be lost when any door is opened)
. Auxiliary Power Outlet
. Audio System

DRIVING AND OPERATING 163

. OnStar System
Shifting Into Park (Electronic Shifter)
To shift into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake 0 179.
2. Press the button on top of the shift lever to shift into P (Park). See Automatic Transmission (Mechanical Shifter) 0 169 or Automatic Transmission (Electronic shifter) 0 171.
3. The P indicator on the shift lever will turn red when the vehicle is in P (Park).
Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine Running

Warning (Continued)
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the vehicle is not in P (Park) with the parking brake set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and shift to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park (Electronic Shifter) 0 163 or Shifting Into Park (Mechanical Shifter) 0 164. If you are towing a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 225.

{ Warning
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. It could overheat and catch fire.
(Continued)

If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running, be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is set before you leave it.

164 DRIVING AND OPERATING

If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 225.
Shifting Into Park (Mechanical Shifter)
To shift into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake.
See Electric Parking Brake 0 179.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition off.
4. Take the remote key with you.

Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine Running
{ Warning
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. It could overheat and catch fire.
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park (Electronic Shifter) 0 163 or Shifting Into Park (Mechanical Shifter) 0 164. If you are towing a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 225.

If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle must be in P (Park) and the parking brake set. After shifting into P (Park), try to move the shift lever out without first pushing the button on the shift lever.
If you can, the shift lever was not fully locked into P (Park).
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then it is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park). To find out how, see "Shifting Into Park" listed previously.
If torque lock does occur, the vehicle may need to be pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).

Shifting out of Park (Mechanical Shifter)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system. The shift lock release is designed to prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park), unless the ignition is on and the brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery. See Jump Starting - North America 0 288 for more information.
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Release the parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake 0 179.
3. Press the shift lever button.
4. Move the shift lever.
If unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the shift lever will not move from P (Park), consult your dealer or a professional towing service.
Shifting out of Park (Electronic Shifter)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled transmission. The shift lock release button is designed to prevent inadvertent shifting out of P (Park) unless the ignition is on, the brake pedal is applied, and the shift lock release button is pressed.
The shift lock control is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9-volt) battery.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 165
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery. See Jump Starting - North America 0 288.
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Ensure the engine is running.
2. Apply the brake pedal.
3. Press and hold the shift lock release button.
4. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
5. The P indicator will turn white and the gear indicator on the shift lever will turn red when the vehicle is no longer in P (Park).
6. After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position.
If the vehicle cannot shift from P (Park), a Driver Information Center (DIC) message, such as "Conditions Not Correct For Shift", will be displayed. Check that the ignition is on, the engine is running, the brake pedal is applied, and the shift lock release button is pressed when you are attempting to shift out of P (Park).

166 DRIVING AND OPERATING

If all of these are met but the vehicle will not shift out of P (Park), see your dealer for service.
Manual Park Release
{ Warning
The transmission will be placed in N (Neutral) when the manual park release is pulled. The vehicle can roll and you or others could be injured. Ensure the vehicle is on level ground.

Pulling the manual park release while the vehicle is on, or turning the ignition on while the manual park release is pulled will result in a Driver Information Center (DIC) message, such as "Service Transmission", being displayed.
To place the vehicle in N (Neutral) using the manual park release:
1. Ensure the vehicle is on level ground and set the parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake 0 179. Release the brake pedal.
2. Turn the vehicle off.

Caution
The manual park release is not intended to be used for towing. Damage may result from using the manual park release in this way. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

The manual park release can be used to shift the vehicle into N (Neutral) when the engine is not running.

3. Use a flat-bladed tool to remove the interior trim panel on the center console to the right of the accelerator pedal.
4. Pull the carpet back to expose the manual park release lever.
5. Ensure more than one minute has elapsed since Step 2. Apply the brake pedal.
6. Pull the manual park release lever 90° to its latching position.

7. With the brake pedal released, place the ignition in ACC/ ACCESSORY. Then apply the brake pedal and release the parking brake.
To return the vehicle to P (Park) using the manual park release:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Rotate the manual park release 90° back to its original position.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Confirm that the vehicle is in P (Park) by turning the ignition on or by placing the vehicle in ACC/ACCESSORY, then ensure that the indicator displays P.
5. Install the interior trim panel.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 167

Parking over Things That Burn

Fuel Management indicator, see Driver Information Center (DIC) for more information on using this display.

{ Warning
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that can burn.
Active Fuel Management
This vehicle's engine may be equipped with Active Fuel Management, which allows the engine to operate on either all of its cylinders, or in reduced cylinder operation mode, depending on the driving conditions. When less power is required, such as cruising at a constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in reduced cylinder operation mode, allowing the vehicle to achieve better fuel economy. When greater power demands are required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing, or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain full-cylinder operation. If the vehicle has an Active

Extended Parking
It is best not to park with the vehicle running. If the vehicle is left running, be sure it will not move and there is adequate ventilation.
See Shifting Into Park (Electronic Shifter) 0 163 or Shifting Into Park (Mechanical Shifter) 0 164 and Engine Exhaust 0 168.
If the vehicle is left parked and running with the remote key outside the vehicle, it will continue to run for up to 15 minutes.
If the vehicle is left parked and running with the remote key inside the vehicle, it will continue to run for up to 30 minutes.
The vehicle could turn off sooner if it is parked on a hill, due to lack of available fuel.

168 DRIVING AND OPERATING

The timer will reset if the vehicle is taken out of P (Park) while it is running.

Engine Exhaust
{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO), which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
. The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation (parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
. The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different.
. The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage.
. The vehicle exhaust system has been modified, damaged, or improperly repaired.
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
. There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or aftermarket modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
. Drive it only with the windows completely down.
. Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. See Engine Exhaust 0 168.

If the vehicle is left with the engine running, follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move. See Shifting Into Park (Electronic Shifter) 0 163 or Shifting Into Park (Mechanical Shifter) 0 164 and Electric Parking Brake 0 179.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 169

Automatic Transmission { Warning

Automatic Transmission (Mechanical Shifter)

It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.

There are several different positions for the shift lever.
P : This position locks the drive wheels. Use P (Park) when starting the vehicle to ensure the vehicle does not move.

Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park (Electronic Shifter) 0 163 or Shifting Into Park (Mechanical Shifter) 0 164. If you are pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 225.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before starting the engine. The vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system. Fully apply the regular brakes first and then press the shift lever button before shifting from

170 DRIVING AND OPERATING

P (Park) when the ignition is on. If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting out of Park (Mechanical Shifter) 0 165 or Shifting out of Park (Electronic Shifter) 0 165.
Caution
Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped.
R : Use this gear to back up.
At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse) can be used to rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transmission. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 153.

N : In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
{ Warning
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed.
Caution
Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.

Caution
A transmission hot message may display if the automatic transmission fluid is too hot. Driving under this condition can damage the vehicle. Stop and idle the engine to cool the automatic transmission fluid. This message clears when the transmission fluid has cooled sufficiently.
D : This position is for normal driving. If more power is needed for passing, press the accelerator pedal down.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding. See "Skidding" under Loss of Control 0 146.
M : This mode can be entered by moving the shift lever from D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode). M (Manual Mode) allows the driver to select gears appropriate for current driving conditions. M (Manual Mode) can be

exited by returning the shift lever to D (Drive). See Manual Mode (Electronic Shifter) 0 177 or Manual Mode (Mechanical Shifter) 0 176.
Caution
Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If the vehicle is stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
While in Sport or Track Mode, the vehicle monitors driving behavior, and automatically enables Performance Shift Features when spirited driving is detected. These features maintain lower transmission gears to increase available engine braking and improve acceleration response. The vehicle will exit these features and return to Sport or Track Mode normal operation after

a short period when no spirited driving is detected. See Driver Mode Control 0 184.
Engine speeds may be increased while driving at highway speeds while the engine is still warming up.
Automatic Transmission (Electronic shifter)

DRIVING AND OPERATING 171
immediate, as in very cold conditions, the indicator on the shift lever may flash until it is fully engaged.
The shift lever always starts from a center position, represented by an up/ down arrow on the shift pattern. After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position.
The transmission does not operate when the vehicle is off.
If the vehicle is in ACC/ACCESSORY, the transmission can be shifted into P (Park).
If the vehicle is turned off while at a relatively high vehicle speed, the transmission will automatically shift to N (Neutral). Once the vehicle is stopped, P (Park) is automatically selected.

The shift pattern is displayed in the top of the shift lever. The selected gear position will illuminate red on the shift lever, while all others will be displayed in white. If the shift is not

172 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Warning (Continued)
be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and place the transmission into P (Park). See Shifting Into Park (Electronic Shifter) 0 163 or Shifting Into Park (Mechanical Shifter) 0 164 and Electric Parking Brake 0 179.

P : Use P (Park) when starting the vehicle to ensure the vehicle does not move.
{ Warning
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the transmission is not in P (Park) with the parking brake set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running. If the engine has been left running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could
(Continued)

This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled transmission. The shift lock release button is

designed to prevent inadvertent shifting out of P (Park) unless the ignition is on, the brake pedal is applied, and the shift lock release button is pressed.
When the vehicle is stopped, press ENGINE START/STOP to turn off the vehicle. The transmission will shift to P (Park) automatically, unless the vehicle is in N (Neutral). See "Car Wash Mode" later in this section.
The vehicle will not shift into P (Park) if it is moving too fast. Stop the vehicle and shift into P (Park).
To shift in and out of P (Park), see Shifting Into Park (Electronic Shifter) 0 163 or Shifting Into Park (Mechanical Shifter) 0 164 and Shifting out of Park (Mechanical Shifter) 0 165 or Shifting out of Park (Electronic Shifter) 0 165.
Service Shift Lever Message
If the message SERVICE SHIFTER SEE OWNER'S MANUAL appears in the Driver Information Center (DIC), the shift lever needs service. Have the

vehicle serviced as soon as possible. If the vehicle is automatically shifting into P (Park), check to see if the P (Park) button on top of the shift lever is stuck. To operate the vehicle, hold the shift lever in the desired gear, R (Reverse) or D (Drive), until vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h (10 mph), then release the shift lever.
R : Use this gear to back up.
If the vehicle is shifted from either R (Reverse) to D (Drive), or D (Drive) or M (Manual Mode) to R (Reverse) while the speed is too high, the vehicle will shift to N (Neutral). Reduce the vehicle speed and try the shift again.
To shift into R (Reverse):
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Press and hold shift lock release button on the side of the shift lever.
3. From the center position, move the shift lever forward through the first detent to the end of travel. R is illuminated in red.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 173

4. After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position.
To shift out of R (Reverse):
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shift to the desired gear.
3. After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position.
At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse) can be used to rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transmission. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 153.
N : In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.

Warning (Continued)
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed.
Caution
Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.

{ Warning
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
(Continued)

The vehicle is not designed to stay in N (Neutral) for more than five minutes. It may automatically shift into P (Park). N (Neutral) is not intended for towing. If the vehicle needs to be towed, see Towing the Vehicle 0 291.
To shift into N (Neutral):

174 DRIVING AND OPERATING

1. Move the shift lever forward to the first detent from the center position.
. If the vehicle is in P (Park), apply the brake pedal and press the shift lock release button while moving the shift lever forward.
. N will illuminate in red.
2. After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position.
To shift out of N (Neutral):
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shift to the desired gear. If shifting from N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) the shift lock release button will need to be pressed.
3. After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position.
Car Wash Mode
This vehicle includes a Car Wash Mode that allows the vehicle to remain in N (Neutral) for use in automatic car washes.

Car Wash Mode (Engine Off ­ Driver in Vehicle)
To place the vehicle in N (Neutral) with the engine off and the vehicle occupied:
1. Drive to the entrance of the car wash.
2. Apply the brake pedal.
3. Shift to N (Neutral).
4. Turn off the engine and release the brake pedal.
5. The indicator should continue to show N. If it does not, repeat Steps 2­4.
6. The vehicle is now ready for the car wash.
Car Wash Mode (Engine Off ­ Driver out of Vehicle)
To place the vehicle in N (Neutral) with the engine off and the vehicle unoccupied:
1. Drive to the entrance of the car wash.
2. Apply the brake pedal.
3. Open the door.

4. Shift to N (Neutral).
5. Turn off the engine and release the brake pedal.
6. The indicator should continue to show N. If it does not, repeat Steps 2­5.
7. Exit the vehicle and close the door. The vehicle is now ready for the car wash.
8. The vehicle may automatically shift to P (Park) upon re-entry.
Car Wash Mode (Engine On ­ Driver in Vehicle)
To place the vehicle in N (Neutral) with the engine on and the vehicle occupied:
1. Drive to the entrance of the car wash.
2. Apply the brake pedal.
3. Shift to N (Neutral).
4. Release the brake pedal. The vehicle is now ready for the car wash.

Car Wash Mode (Engine On ­ Driver out of Vehicle)
To place the vehicle in N (Neutral) with the engine on and the vehicle unoccupied:
1. Drive to the entrance of the car wash.
2. Apply the brake pedal.
3. Open the door.
4. Shift to N (Neutral), then release the brake pedal.
5. The indicator should continue to show N. If it does not, repeat Steps 2­4.
6. Exit the vehicle and close the door. The vehicle is now ready for the car wash.
7. The vehicle may automatically shift to P (Park) upon re-entry.
Caution
A transmission hot message may display if the automatic transmission fluid is too hot.
(Continued)

Caution (Continued)
Driving under this condition can damage the vehicle. Stop and idle the engine to cool the automatic transmission fluid. This message clears when the transmission fluid has cooled sufficiently.
D : This position is for normal driving. If more power is needed for passing, press the accelerator pedal down.
To shift into D (Drive):
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. From the center position, move the shift lever back.
. If the vehicle is in P (Park) press the shift lock release button while pulling the shift lever back.
. D will illuminate in red.
. After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 175
To shift out of D (Drive):
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shift to the desired gear.
3. After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding. See "Skidding" under Loss of Control 0 146.
M : This mode can be entered from D (Drive) by pulling back on the shift lever. The M in the shift pattern will illuminate red, and the D will switch to white. After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position. M (Manual Mode) allows gears appropriate for current driving conditions to be selected.
To exit M (Manual Mode) and return to D (Drive), pull back on the shift lever. The D in the shift pattern will illuminate in red, and the M will switch to white. See Manual Mode (Electronic Shifter) 0 177 or Manual Mode (Mechanical Shifter) 0 176.

176 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Caution
Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If the vehicle is stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

Manual Mode (Mechanical Shifter)
Tap Shift
Caution
Driving with the engine at a high rpm without upshifting while using Tap Shift, could damage the vehicle. Always upshift when necessary while using Tap Shift.

Engine speeds may be increased while driving at highway speeds while the engine is still warming up.

Vehicles with Tap Shift have controls on the back of the steering wheel to manually shift the automatic transmission.
To enter Permanent Tap Shift Mode:
1. Move the shift lever from D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode). While in Tap Shift Mode, the M on the instrument cluster will become highlighted, and the current gear is indicated.
2. Tap the left control to downshift, and the right control to upshift. To shift to the lowest available gear, press and hold the left control.
3. To exit, move the shift lever back to D (Drive).
With the shift lever in D (Drive) and not in Permanent Tap Shift Mode, the tap shift controls will activate a temporary tap manual shift mode, allowing the transmission to be manually shifted. Automatic shifts return after no manual shifts have been done for seven to 10 seconds.

The Temporary Tap Shift Mode can also be deactivated by holding the right upshift control briefly.
While using Tap Shift, the vehicle will have firmer, quicker shifting. You can use this for sport driving or when climbing or descending hills, to stay in gear longer, or to downshift for more power or engine braking.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine revolutions per minute (rpm). The transmission will not automatically shift to the next lower gear if the engine rpm is too high, nor to the next higher gear when the maximum engine rpm is reached.
If shifting is prevented for any reason, a SHIFT DENIED message will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
When accelerating the vehicle from a stop in snowy and icy conditions, it is suggested to shift into second gear. A higher gear allows the vehicle to gain more traction on slippery surfaces.

Manual Mode (Electronic Shifter)
Tap Shift
Caution
Driving with the engine at a high rpm without upshifting while using Tap Shift, could damage the vehicle. Always upshift when necessary while using Tap Shift.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 177
Vehicles with Tap Shift have controls on the back of the steering wheel to manually shift the automatic transmission.
Permanent Tap Shift Mode
To enter Permanent Tap Shift Mode:
1. With the vehicle in D (Drive), pull back on the shift lever to activate M (Manual Mode). The M in the shift pattern will illuminate in red, and the D will switch to white.
2. After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position.
3. Press the controls on the back of the steering wheel to shift. Use the left steering wheel control to downshift, and the right control to upshift. To shift to the lowest available gear, press and hold the left control.
To exit Permanent Tap Shift Mode:
1. To exit M (Manual Mode) and return to D (Drive), pull back on the shift lever. The D in the shift pattern will illuminate in red, and the M will switch to white.

178 DRIVING AND OPERATING

2. After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position.
M (Manual Mode) can be exited to return to D (Drive) at any speed by pulling the lever rearward from the center position. It is not necessary to stop the vehicle or shift to N (Neutral) or P (Park) before shifting back to D (Drive).
Temporary Tap Manual Shift Mode
To enter Temporary Tap Shift Mode:
1. With the transmission in D (Drive) and not in Permanent Tap Shift Mode, the Tap Shift controls will activate a temporary tap manual shift mode, allowing the transmission to be manually shifted.

While using Tap Shift, the vehicle will have firmer, quicker shifting. This can be used for sport driving or when climbing or descending hills, to stay in gear longer, or to downshift for more power or engine braking.
The transmission will only allow shifting into gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine revolutions per minute (rpm). If shifting is prevented for any reason, a SHIFT DENIED message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. The transmission will not automatically shift to the next higher gear if the engine rpm is too high. It will only automatically shift to the next lower gear if the engine rpm is much too low.

2. To shift to the lowest available gear, press and hold the left control.

3. To deactivate, hold the right control briefly. Automatic shifts return after no manual shifts have been done for seven to 10 seconds.

Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive
Vehicles with this feature always send engine power to all four wheels. It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for road conditions.

Brakes
Electric Brake Boost
Vehicles equipped with electric brake boost have hydraulic brake circuits that are electronically controlled when the brake pedal is applied during normal operation. The system performs routine tests and turns off within a few minutes after the vehicle is turned off. Noise may be heard during this time. If the brake pedal is pressed during the tests or when the electric brake boost system is off, a noticeable change in pedal force and travel may be felt. This is normal.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps prevent a braking skid and maintain steering while braking hard.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 179
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows steering and braking at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help even more than braking.

If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light 0 103.
ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot on the brake pedal and does not always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle ahead, there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly. Hearing and feeling ABS operate is normal.

Electric Parking Brake
The vehicle has an Electric Parking Brake (EPB). The EPB can always be activated, even if the ignition is off. To prevent draining the battery, avoid repeated cycles of the EPB system when the engine is not running.

180 DRIVING AND OPERATING

The system has a Y or PARK Electric Parking Brake light, and a 8
Service Parking Brake light. See Electric Parking Brake Light 0 102 and Service Electric Parking Brake Light 0 102.
Before leaving the vehicle, check for
the Y or PARK light to ensure that
the parking brake is applied.
EPB Apply
To apply the EPB:
1. Be sure the vehicle is at a complete stop.
2. Press the EPB switch momentarily.
The Y or PARK light will flash and
then stay on once the EPB is fully
applied. If the Y or PARK light
flashes continuously, then the EPB is only partially applied or there is a problem with the EPB. A DIC message will display. Release the EPB and try to apply it again. If the light does not come on, or keeps flashing, have the vehicle serviced. Do not drive the

vehicle if the Y or PARK light is
flashing. See your dealer. See Electric Parking Brake Light 0 102.
If the 8 light is on, press the EPB
switch and hold it. Continue to hold
the switch until the Y or PARK light remains on. If the 8 light remains on,
see your dealer.
If the EPB is applied while the vehicle is moving, the vehicle will decelerate as long as the switch is pressed. If the switch is pressed until the vehicle comes to a stop, the EPB will remain applied.
The vehicle may automatically apply the EPB in some situations when the vehicle is not moving. This is normal, and is done to periodically check the correct operation of the EPB system.
If the EPB fails to apply, block the rear wheels to prevent vehicle movement.
EPB Release
To release the EPB:
1. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ ACCESSORY.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Press the EPB switch momentarily.
The EPB is released when the Y or
PARK light is off.
If the 8 light is on, release the EPB by
pressing and holding the EPB switch. Continue to hold the switch until the
Y or PARK light is off. If either light
stays on after release is attempted, see your dealer.
Caution
Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving.
Automatic EPB Release
The EPB will automatically release if the vehicle is running, placed into gear, and an attempt is made to drive

away. Avoid rapid acceleration when the EPB is applied, to preserve parking brake lining life.
Brake Assist
Brake Assist detects rapid brake pedal applications due to emergency braking situations and provides additional braking to activate the Antilock Brake System (ABS) if the brake pedal is not pushed hard enough to activate ABS normally. Minor noise, brake pedal pulsation, and/or pedal movement during this time may occur. Continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates. Brake Assist disengages when the brake pedal is released.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
{ Warning
Do not rely on the HSA feature. HSA does not replace the need to pay attention and drive safely. You may not hear or feel alerts or
(Continued)

DRIVING AND OPERATING 181

Warning (Continued)
warnings provided by this system. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. See Defensive Driving 0 143.

Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH)

When the vehicle is stopped on a grade, Hill Start Assist (HSA) temporarily prevents the vehicle from rolling in an unintended direction during the transition from brake pedal release to accelerator pedal apply. The brakes release when the accelerator pedal is applied or automatically release after a few seconds. The brakes may also release under other conditions. Do not rely on HSA to hold the vehicle.
HSA is available when the vehicle is facing uphill in a forward gear, or when facing downhill in R (Reverse). The vehicle must come to a complete stop on a grade for HSA to activate.

{ Warning
Do not rely on this feature. It does not replace the need to pay attention and drive safely. You may not hear or feel alerts or warnings provided by this system. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage.

182 DRIVING AND OPERATING

When Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH) is turned on and the vehicle is braked to a stop, AVH prevents the vehicle from moving during the transition from brake pedal release to accelerator pedal apply. The brakes release when the accelerator pedal is applied. The brakes may also release under other conditions. Do not rely on AVH to hold the vehicle.
If the accelerator pedal is not applied within a few minutes, the Electric Parking Brake will apply. The parking brake will also apply if the driver door is opened or the driver seat belt is unfastened while AVH is holding the vehicle.
AVH can be turned on by pressing AUTO HOLD. The indicator light on the switch will come on. The AVH light on the instrument panel will come on while AVH is actively holding the vehicle. See Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH) Light 0 103.

Ride Control Systems
Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) and StabiliTrak/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC). These systems help limit wheel slip and assist the driver in maintaining control, especially on slippery road conditions.
TCS activates if it senses that any of the drive wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system brakes the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
StabiliTrak/ESC activates when the computer senses a difference between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak/ESC selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle's brakes to help steer the vehicle in the intended direction.

If cruise control is being used and TCS or StabiliTrak/ESC begins to limit wheel spin, cruise control will disengage. Cruise control may be turned back on when road conditions allow.
Both systems come on automatically when the vehicle is started and begins to move. The systems may be heard or felt while they are operating or while performing diagnostic checks. This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle.
It is recommended to leave both systems on for normal driving conditions, but It may be necessary to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 153 and "Turning the Systems Off and On" later in this section.

The indicator light for both systems is in the instrument cluster. This light will:
. Flash when TCS is limiting wheel spin.
. Flash when StabiliTrak/ESC is activated.
. Turn on and stay on when either system is not working.
If either system fails to turn on or to activate, a message may display in the Driver Information Center (DIC), and
d comes on and stays on to indicate
that the system is inactive and is not assisting the driver in maintaining control. The vehicle is safe to drive, but driving should be adjusted accordingly.
If d comes on and stays on:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 seconds.
3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. if d comes on and
stays on, the vehicle may need more time to diagnose the problem. If the condition persists, see your dealer. Turning the Systems Off and On
Caution Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate heavily when TCS is off. The vehicle driveline could be damaged.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 183
To turn off only TCS, press and
release g. The traction off light i
displays in the instrument cluster. A DIC message may display.
To turn TCS on again, press and
release g. The traction off light i
displayed in the instrument cluster will turn off.
If TCS is limiting wheel spin when g
is pressed, the system will not turn off until the wheels stop spinning.
To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak/
ESC, press and hold g until the traction off light i and StabiliTrak/ ESC OFF light g come on and stay on
in the instrument cluster. A DIC message may display.
To turn TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC on
again, press and release g. The traction off light i and StabiliTrak/ ESC OFF light g in the instrument
cluster turn off.
Adding accessories can affect the vehicle's performance. See Accessories and Modifications 0 235.

184 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Driver Mode Control
Driver Mode Control (DMC) adds a sportier feel, provides a more comfortable ride, or assists in different weather conditions or terrain. This system simultaneously changes the software settings of various sub-systems to optimize driving performance. Depending on the option package, available features, and mode selection; the exhaust, suspension, steering, and powertrain will change settings to achieve the desired mode characteristics. If the vehicle is equipped with Magnetic Ride Control, selecting the various Driver Modes adjusts the ride of the vehicle to enhance the ride performance for the road conditions and the selected mode.

and personalize the driving experience. See Drive Mode Customization for further details on available customizations.
Tour, Sport, Snow/Ice, and Track are four modes that have preset vehicle settings for use in different driving conditions. For further details see Driver Mode Selector Attributes Affected.
Mode Activation

Driver Mode Control has multiple modes: My Mode, Tour, Sport, Snow/ Ice, Track, and V-Mode. The Track Mode and V-Mode are for V-Series models only.
My Mode and V­Mode are two modes which can be customized by the driver. In these two modes, vehicle settings are configured to enhance

Driver Mode Control Switch
To activate My Mode, Tour, Sport,
Snow/Ice, and Track Mode, press y or z on the MODE switch on the
center console to make a mode

selection. Every press will scroll to the next available mode. When a mode is selected, a unique and persistent indicator will be display in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
V-Mode Button To activate V-Mode (if equipped), press the V-Mode button on the steering wheel. To deactivate, driver can either select a different mode through the DMC switch or press the V-Mode button on the steering wheel. When V-Mode is deactivated through the V-Mode button, DMC is always set back to Tour Mode.

Tour Mode
Use for normal city and highway driving to provide a smooth, soft ride.
This setting provides a balance between comfort and handling. This is the standard mode, and when selected, no persistent indicator will display. For further details on Tour Mode see Driver Mode Selector Attributes Affected.
Sport Mode
Use where road conditions or personal preference demand a more controlled response.
When selected, the Sport Mode indicator will display.
In this mode, the vehicle monitors driving behaviors and automatically enables Performance Shift Features when spirited driving is detected. These features maintain lower transmission gears to increase available engine braking and improve acceleration response. The vehicle will exit this feature and return to normal operation after a short period when no spirited driving is detected. The

DRIVING AND OPERATING 185

steering will change to provide more precise control. If the vehicle has Magnetic Ride Control, the suspension will change to provide better cornering performance.
Competitive Driving Mode can be accessed through this mode. See Competitive Driving Mode 0 189.
For further details on Sport Mode, see Driver Mode Selector Attributes Affected.
Snow/Ice Mode
Use when more traction is needed during slippery conditions.
Snow/Ice Mode will use a different accelerator pedal map to optimize traction on a slippery surface. The accelerator pedal will reduce engine torque at small pedal inputs.
When selected, the Snow/Ice Mode indicator will display.
This feature is not intended for use when the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice, snow, or gravel. If the vehicle becomes stuck, see If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 153.

For further details on Snow/Ice Mode, see Driver Mode Selector Attributes Affected.
Track Mode ( V-Series Only)
Use when maximum vehicle handling is desired. For use when driving on a closed race course or a drag strip.
When selected, the Track Mode indicator will display.
When in Track Mode, the automatic transmission and steering will function similar to Sport Mode. The accelerator pedal is adjusted to give maximum control during the highest level of spirited driving. The Magnetic Ride Control will be set to the optimum level for vehicle responsiveness. Performance Traction Management (PTM) can be accessed through this mode. See Performance Traction.
For further details on Track Mode, see Driver Mode Selector Attributes Affected.

186 DRIVING AND OPERATING

My Mode
My Mode is used to personalize everyday driving. This mode is designed to allow the diver to configure vehicle sub-systems to their own preference for city and normal driving.
Through the center display, the following vehicle sub-systems may be available for customization in this mode:
. Engine Sound: Stealth, Tour (Default), Sport, Track
. Steering: Tour (default), Sport, Track
. Suspension: Tour (default), Sport, Track
. Brake Response: Tour (default), Sport
For information on the range of settings, see Driver Mode Customization.
V-Mode (V-Series Only)
V-Mode is used to personalize dynamic driving. This mode is designed to allow the driver to

configure vehicle sub-systems to their own preference for maximum handling. V-Mode further enhances the drivers experience by adding a powertrain customization.
Through the center display, the following vehicle sub-systems may be available for customization in this mode:
. Engine Sound: Stealth, Tour (Default), Sport, Track
. Steering: Tour (default), Sport, Track
. Suspension: Tour (default), Sport, Track
. Brake Response: Tour (default), Sport
For information on the range of settings, see Driver Mode Customization.
There are six attributes that vary by mode shown below. Not all vehicles have all features, depending on the vehicle option.

Modes:
Powertrain Throttle Progression Transmission Shift Mode Engine Sound Steering Suspension (if equipped with Magnetic Ride Control) Traction and Stability Control Competitive Driving Mode (if equipped) Performance Traction Mode (if equipped) Brake Response

TOUR Default Tour Tour Tour Tour Tour Tour
Tour Not Available Not Available
Tour

DRIVING AND OPERATING 187

SPORT

TRACK

WEATHER

Sport Tour Sport Sport Sport Sport

Track Track Track Track Track Track

Snow/Ice Snow/Ice Snow/Ice
Tour Tour Tour

Sport Available Not Available
Sport

Track Not Available
Available Sport

Tour Not Available Not Available
Tour

Driver Mode Selector Attributes Affected
Throttle Progression
Adjusts throttle sensitivity by selecting how quick or slow the throttle reacts to input.

. Snow/Ice - The accelerator pedal will reduce engine torque at small pedal inputs. This allows better wheel control on slippery surfaces.
. Track - The accelerator pedal is adjusted to give maximum control during the highest level of spirited driving.

Transmission Shift Mode
Sport or Track Dynamic Performance Mode (DPM) allows the transmission to hold the current gear after a quick release of a heavily applied accelerator pedal. This provides greater engine braking and enhanced vehicle control without using the paddles. DPM recognizes aggressive cornering, heavy

188 DRIVING AND OPERATING

braking, and high acceleration to select and hold lower gears when not using paddles. The shifts are also firmer to increase the quickness of shifting.
Engine Sound
Adjusts the volume of engine noise.
Steering (Assist Effort)
Adjusts from a lighter steering feel in Tour Mode to reduced assist in Sport and Track Mode for more steering feel.
Magnetic Ride Control (If Equipped)
Adjusts the shock dampening firmness from a comfort tune in Tour Mode to an optimized responsiveness tune in Sport and Track.
Stability Control
. Competitive Mode allows less computer control to permit some slide and drift and is selected with the button ­ only available in Sport Mode.

. StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) can be turned off by pressing and holding the button for five seconds.
Brake Response
Adjusts brake pedal sensitivity by selecting how quick or slow the brakes reply to input.
Driver Mode Customization
The vehicle is equipped to modify following vehicle settings based on vehicle content. See Driving Mode under Vehicle Personalization 0 116 to customize and personalize My Mode and/or V­Mode..
Engine Sound
Engine sound adjusts the volume of engine noise. Setting ranges from quietest to loudest volume as you move from Stealth through Track.
. Stealth, Tour, Sport, Track

Steering
This setting adjusts the effort required to turn the steering wheel. The steering wheel offers better feedback but requires more effort as you move from Tour to Track.
. Tour, Sport, Track
Suspension
This setting adjusts the firmness of the suspension in the vehicle. Suspension adjust stiffness of the shocks and / or springs. The ride is more comfortable at lower settings and is stiffer at higher settings for better control.
. Tour, Sport, Track
Powertrain
This setting adjusts the throttle response, gear shifting and engine performance. An increased throttle response enhances the acceleration feel as you move towards Track, but with a comfort trade-off due to more aggressive gear shifting.
. Tour, Sport, Track, Snow/Ice

Brake Response
This setting adjusts the brake pedal response. Settings range from a slower response for more comfortable driving to the quickest response for quicker deceleration. Brake pedal travel decreases and caliper pressure increases as you move from Comfort to Sport.
. Tour, Sport
Competitive Driving Mode
To select this optional handling mode,
press Y quickly two times and the
DIC will display COMPETITIVE MODE ON. While in the Competitive Driving
Mode, the traction off light i and StabiliTrak/ESC OFF light g will come
on in the instrument cluster. TCS does not limit wheel spin, the Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (eLSD) allows increased vehicle agility, and more effort is required to turn the steering wheel. See "Limited-Slip Differential (V­Series Only)" later in this section. Adjust your driving accordingly.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 189

Press Y again, or turn the ignition to
ACC/ACCESSORY and restart the vehicle, to turn TCS back on. The
traction off light i and StabiliTrak/ ESC OFF light g will go out in the
instrument cluster.
Caution
When traction control is turned off, or Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to lose traction.

This light is on when the vehicle is in the PTM Mode. To select this optional handling mode, the vehicle mode must be in Track. Then quickly press
g on the center console two times.
Performance Traction Wet -- ESC On displays in the DIC.

Performance Traction Management (PTM)
If equipped, Performance Traction Management (PTM) integrates the TCS, StabiliTrak/ESC, and Magnetic Ride Control systems to provide improved and consistent performance when cornering. The amount of available engine power is based on the mode selected, track conditions, driver skill, and the radius of each corner.

To experience the performance benefit of this system, after entering a curve and at the point where normal acceleration occurs, fully press the accelerator pedal. The PTM system will modify the level of engine power for a smooth and consistent corner exit.
The PTM system contains five modes. These modes are selected by turning the MODE switch on the center console. Scroll through modes 1­5 by turning the mode control dial.

190 DRIVING AND OPERATING

The following is a DIC display description and the recommended usage of each mode:

. StabiliTrak/ESC is on and more engine power is available than in mode 2.

PTM 1 ­ WET
. Intended for all driver skill levels.
. Wet or damp conditions only -- not intended for use in heavy rain or standing water.
. StabiliTrak/ESC is on and engine power is reduced based on conditions.
PTM 2 ­ DRY
. For use by less experienced drivers or while learning a new track.
. Dry conditions only.
. StabiliTrak/ESC is on and engine power is slightly reduced.
PTM 3 ­ SPORT 1
. For use by drivers who are familiar with the track.
. Dry conditions only.
. Requires more driving skill than mode 2.

PTM 4 ­ SPORT 2
. For use by drivers who are familiar with the track.
. Dry conditions only.
. Requires more driving skill than modes 2 or 3.
. StabiliTrak/ESC is off and available engine power is the same as mode 3.
PTM 5 ­ RACE
. For use by experienced drivers who are familiar with the track.
. Dry conditions only.
. Requires more driving skill than in other modes.
. StabiliTrak/ESC is off and engine power is available for maximum cornering speed.

Press and release g to turn off PTM
and return to the TCS and StabiliTrak/
ESC systems. The traction off light i and StabiliTrak Off light i will
go out.
Launch Control
If equipped, Launch Control is available within Competitive Driving Mode and Performance Traction Management (PTM) to allow high levels of vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a form of traction control that manages tire spin while launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use during closed course race events where consistent zero to 60 and quarter mile times are desirable.
Launch Control is only available when the following criteria are met:
. Competitive Driving Mode is selected or any of the Performance Traction Management modes are selected. The traction off light comes on in the instrument cluster and the appropriate Driver Information Center (DIC) message displays.

. The vehicle is not moving.
. The steering wheel is pointing straight.
Automatic Transmissions
. The brake pedal is firmly pressed to the floor, equivalent to a panic brake event.
. The accelerator pedal is rapidly applied to wide open throttle. If the vehicle rolls due to wide open throttle, release the throttle, press the brake pedal more firmly, and re-apply the accelerator to wide open throttle.
Launch Control will initially limit engine speed as you rapidly apply the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. Allow the engine rpm to stabilize. A smooth, quick release of the brake pedal, while maintaining the fully pressed accelerator pedal, will manage wheel slip.
After the vehicle is launched, the system continues in Competitive Driving Mode or PTM.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 191

Competitive Driving Mode, PTM, and Launch Control are systems designed for a closed course race track and not intended for public roads. The systems are not intended to compensate for lack of driver experience or familiarity with the race track.

For vehicles with eLSD, driven under severe conditions, the rear axle fluid should be changed. See Competitive Driving Mode 0 189 and Maintenance Schedule 0 303.

Limited-Slip Differential
If equipped, the Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (eLSD) is automatically activated. eLSD actively monitors vehicle sensors and driver inputs to determine the amount of change for the conditions. With eLSD, the vehicle has:
. Enhanced high-speed control.
. Improved traction through corners, allowing more acceleration.
. More precise steering.
. Increased vehicle agility.
. Integration with StabiliTrak/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC).

192 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Cruise Control
{ Warning
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. Do not use cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.

control automatically disengages. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 182. If a collision alert occurs when cruise control is activated, cruise control is disengaged. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 210. When road conditions allow cruise control to be safely used, it can be turned back on.
Cruise control will disengage if either TCS or StabiliTrak/ESC is turned off.
If the brakes are applied, cruise control disengages.

With cruise control, a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
If the Traction Control/StabiliTrak/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system begins to limit wheel spin while using cruise control, the cruise

J : Press to turn the system on and
off. A white indicator appears in the instrument cluster when cruise is turned on.
RES+ : If there is a set speed in memory, press briefly to resume to that speed or press and hold to accelerate. If the cruise control is already active, use to increase vehicle speed. To increase speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press RES+ to the first detent. To increase speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer, press RES+ to the second detent.
SET- : Press briefly to set the speed and activate cruise control. If the cruise control is already active, use to decrease vehicle speed. To decrease speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press SET- to the first detent. To decrease speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer, press SET- to the second detent.
* : Press to disengage cruise control
without erasing the set speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control
If J is on when not in use, SET- or
RES+ could get pressed and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep J off
when cruise is not being used.
1. Press J.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press and release SET-. The desired set speed briefly appears in the instrument cluster.
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator.
When the cruise control has been set to the desired speed, a green cruise control indicator appears on the instrument cluster and a cruise set speed message appears on the Head-Up Display (HUD), if equipped.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied
or * is pressed, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 193

Once the vehicle speed reaches about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press RES+ briefly. The vehicle returns to the previous set speed.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is already activated:
. Press and hold RES+ until the desired speed is reached, then release it.
. To increase vehicle speed in small increments, briefly press RES+ to the first detent. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) faster.
. To increase vehicle speed in larger increments, briefly press RES+ to the second detent. For each press, the vehicle speed increases to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer.
The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster 0 93. The increment value used depends on the units displayed.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is already activated:
. Press and hold SET- until the desired lower speed is reached, then release it.
. To decrease the vehicle speed in small increments, briefly press SET- to the first detent. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.
. To decrease the vehicle speed in larger increments, briefly press SET- to the second detent. For each press, the vehicle speed decreases to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer.
The cruise control system may automatically brake to slow the vehicle down.
The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster 0 93. The increment value used depends on the units displayed.

194 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed.

Ending Cruise Control
There are four ways to end cruise control: . Step lightly on the brake pedal.
. Press *.

While pressing the accelerator pedal or shortly following the release to override cruise, briefly applying SET- will result in cruise set to the current vehicle speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, the cruise control system may automatically brake to slow the vehicle down. Also, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. If the brake pedal is applied, cruise control disengages.

. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
. Press J.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is erased
from memory if J is pressed or if the
ignition is turned off.
Adaptive Cruise Control
If equipped, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), allows the cruise control set speed and following gap to be selected. Read this entire section before using this system. The following gap is the following time between your vehicle and a vehicle detected directly ahead in your path, moving in the same direction. If no vehicle is detected in your path, ACC

works like regular cruise control. ACC uses camera and radar sensors. See Radio Frequency Statement 0 331.
If a vehicle is detected in your path, ACC can speed up the vehicle or apply limited, moderate braking to maintain the selected following gap. To disengage ACC, apply the brake. If ACC is controlling your vehicle speed when the Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system activates, ACC may automatically disengage. See Traction Control/ Electronic Stability Control 0 182. When road conditions allow ACC to be safely used, ACC can be turned back on. ACC will not engage if the TCS or StabiliTrak/ESC is disabled.
{ Warning
ACC has limited braking ability and may not have time to slow the vehicle down enough to avoid a collision with another vehicle you are following. This can occur when vehicles suddenly slow or stop
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
ahead, or enter your lane. Also see "Alerting the Driver" in this section. Complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving 0 143.
{ Warning
ACC will not detect or brake for children, pedestrians, animals, or other objects.
Do not use ACC when: . On winding and hilly roads or when the sensors are blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead. Keep the entire front of the vehicle clean. (Continued)

Warning (Continued) . Visibility is low, such as in fog, rain, or snow conditions. ACC performance is limited under these conditions. . On slippery roads where fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip.
J : Press to turn the system on or
off. The indicator turns white on the instrument cluster when ACC is turned on.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 195
RES+ : Press briefly to resume the previous set speed or to increase vehicle speed if ACC is already activated. To increase speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press RES+ to the first detent. To increase speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer, press RES+ to the second detent.
SET­ : Press briefly to set the speed and activate ACC or to decrease vehicle speed if ACC is already activated. To decrease speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press SET- to the first detent. To decrease speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer, press SET- to the second detent.
* : Press to disengage ACC without
erasing the selected set speed from memory.
[ : Press to select a following gap
time (or distance) setting for ACC of Far, Medium, or Near.
The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster 0 93. The increment value used depends on the units displayed.

196 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Switching Between ACC and Regular Cruise Control

{ Warning

To switch between ACC and regular
cruise control, press and hold *.
A Driver Information Display (DIC) message displays. See Vehicle Messages 0 115.

Always check the cruise control indicator on the instrument cluster to determine which mode cruise control is in before using the feature. If ACC is not active, the vehicle will not automatically brake for other vehicles, which could cause a crash if the brakes are not applied manually. You and others could be seriously injured or killed.

ACC Indicator Regular Cruise Control Indicator

Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

When ACC is activated, a green o
indicator will be lit on the instrument cluster and the following gap will be displayed. When the regular cruise
control is activated, a green J
indicator will be lit on the instrument cluster; the following gap will not display.
When the vehicle is turned on, the cruise control mode will be set to the last mode used before the vehicle was turned off.

If J is on when not in use, SET-/RES
+ could be pressed by mistake and activate ACC when not desired. Keep
J off when cruise is not being used.
Select the set speed desired for ACC. This is the vehicle speed when no vehicle is detected in its path.
While the vehicle is moving, ACC will not set at a speed less than 25 km/h (15 mph), although it can be resumed when driving at lower speeds.
To set ACC while moving:

1. Press J
2. Get up to the desired speed
3. Press and release SET-
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal
After ACC is set, it may immediately apply the brakes if a vehicle ahead is detected closer than the selected following gap.
ACC can also be set while the vehicle is stopped if ACC is on and the brake pedal is applied.
The ACC indicator displays on the instrument cluster and Head-Up Display (HUD), if equipped. When ACC is turned on, the indicator will be lit white. When ACC is engaged, the indicator will turn green.
Be mindful of speed limits, surrounding traffic speeds, and weather conditions when selecting the set speed.

Resuming a Set Speed
If ACC is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied, ACC is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory.
To begin using ACC again, press RES+ up briefly while moving more than 5 kph (5 mph). The vehicle returns to the previous set speed.
If the vehicle is stopped with the brake pedal applied, press RES+ and release the brake pedal. ACC will hold the vehicle until RES+ or the accelerator pedal is pressed.
A green ACC indicator and the set speed display on the instrument cluster. The vehicle ahead indicator may be flashing if a vehicle ahead was present and moved. See "Approaching and Following a Vehicle" later in this section.
Once ACC has resumed, if there is no vehicle ahead, if the vehicle ahead is beyond the selected following gap, or if the vehicle has exited a sharp curve, then the vehicle speed will increase to the set speed.

Increasing Speed While ACC is at a Set Speed
If ACC is already activated, do one of the following:
. Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed. Press SET­ . Release the control and the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will now cruise at the higher speed.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed, ACC will not brake because it is overridden. The ACC indicator turns blue on the instrument cluster and head-up display, if equipped.
. Press and hold RES+ until the desired set speed appears on the display, then release it.
. To increase vehicle speed in small increments, press RES+ to the first detent. For each press, the vehicle goes 1 km/h (1 mph).
. To increase vehicle speed in larger increments, press RES+ to the second detent. For each press, the vehicle speed increases to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 197
The set speed can also be increased while the vehicle is stopped.
. If stopped with the brake applied, press RES+ until the desired set speed is displayed.
. Pressing RES+ when there is no longer a vehicle ahead or the vehicle ahead is pulling away and the brake is not applied will cause the ACC to resume.
When it is determined there is no vehicle ahead or the vehicle ahead is beyond the selected following gap, then the vehicle speed will increase to the set speed.
The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster 0 93. The increment value used depends on the units displayed.
Reducing Speed While ACC Is at a Set Speed
If ACC is already activated, do one of the following:

198 DRIVING AND OPERATING

. Use the brake to get to the desired lower speed. Release the brake and press SET­. The vehicle will now cruise at the lower speed.
. Press and hold SET­ until the desired lower speed is displayed, then release it.

Selecting the Follow Distance Gap
When a slower moving vehicle is detected ahead within the selected following gap, ACC will adjust the vehicle's speed and attempt to maintain the follow distance gap selected.

. To decrease the vehicle speed in smaller increments, press SET- to the first detent. For each press, the vehicle goes 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.
. To decrease speed in larger increments, press or hold SET- to the second detent. For each press, the vehicle speed decreases to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer. While holding SET-, the vehicle speed decreases to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) step, then continues to decrease by 5 km/h (5 mph) at a time.
The set speed can also be decreased while the vehicle is stopped.
. If stopped with the brake applied, press or hold SET- until the desired set speed is displayed.

Press [ on the steering wheel to
adjust the following gap.
When pressed, the current gap setting displays briefly on the instrument cluster and HUD. The gap setting will be maintained until it is changed.
Since each gap setting corresponds to a following time (Far, Medium, or Near), the following distance will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed, the further back your vehicle will follow a vehicle detected ahead. Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting the following gap. The range of selectable gaps may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must be active in order to change the gap setting used by the ACC feature. If ACC is not active, the gap button

will modify the alert timing sensitivity (Far, Medium, or Near) for the Forward Collision Alert (FCA) feature. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 210. Alerting the Driver
If ACC is engaged, driver action may be required when ACC cannot apply sufficient braking because of approaching a vehicle too rapidly. When this condition occurs, the collision alert symbol on the HUD will flash on the windshield. Either eight beeps will sound from the front, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. See "Collision/ Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116. See Defensive Driving 0 143.

Approaching and Following a Vehicle
The vehicle ahead indicator is in the instrument cluster and HUD display, if equipped. The vehicle ahead indicator only displays when a vehicle is detected in your vehicle's path moving in the same direction. If this indicator is not displaying, ACC will not respond to or brake for vehicles ahead. ACC automatically slows the vehicle down and adjusts vehicle speed to follow a detected vehicle ahead at the selected follow gap. The vehicle speed increases or decreases to follow a detected vehicle in front of your vehicle when that vehicle is traveling slower than your vehicle set speed. It may apply limited braking, if necessary. When braking is active,

the brake lamps will come on. The automatic braking may feel or sound different than if the brakes were applied manually. This is normal.
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
{ Warning
ACC may not detect and react to stopped or slow-moving vehicles ahead of you. For example, the system may not brake for a vehicle it has never detected moving. This can occur in stop-and-go traffic or when a vehicle suddenly appears due to a vehicle ahead changing lanes. Your vehicle may not stop and could cause a crash. Use caution when using ACC. Your complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 199
ACC Automatically Disengages
ACC may automatically disengage and the driver will need to manually apply the brakes to slow the vehicle when:
. The sensors are blocked.
. The Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak/ESC has activated or been disabled.
. There is a fault in the system.
. The radar falsely reports blockage when driving in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles or roadside objects. A DIC message may display to indicate that ACC is temporarily unavailable.
The ACC indicator will turn white when ACC is no longer active.
In some cases, when ACC will not activate, regular cruise control may be used. See "Switching Between ACC and Regular Cruise Control" previously in this section. Always consider driving conditions before using either cruise control system.

200 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Notification to Resume ACC
ACC will maintain a follow gap behind a detected vehicle and slow your vehicle to a stop behind that vehicle.

A DIC warning message may display indicating to shift to P (Park) before exiting the vehicle. See Vehicle Messages 0 115.

If the stopped vehicle ahead has driven away and ACC has not resumed, the vehicle ahead indicator will flash as a reminder to check traffic ahead before proceeding. In addition, the left and right sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse three times, or three beeps will sound. See "Alert Type" and "Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier" in "Collision/Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116.

{ Warning
If ACC has stopped the vehicle, and if ACC is disengaged, turned off, or canceled, the vehicle will no longer be held at a stop. The vehicle can move. When ACC is holding the vehicle at a stop, always be prepared to manually apply the brakes.

When the vehicle ahead drives away, press RES+ or the accelerator pedal to resume ACC. If stopped for more than two minutes or if the driver door is opened and the driver seat belt is unbuckled, ACC automatically applies the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle. The Electric Parking Brake light will turn on. See Electric Parking Brake 0 179.

{ Warning
Leaving the vehicle without placing it in P (Park) can be dangerous. Do not leave the vehicle while it is being held at a stop by ACC. Always place the vehicle in P (Park) and turn off the ignition before leaving the vehicle.

ACC Override
If using the accelerator pedal while ACC is active, the ACC indicator turns blue on the instrument cluster and in the HUD (if equipped) indicating ACC braking will not occur. ACC will resume operation when the accelerator pedal is not being pressed.
{ Warning
The ACC will not automatically apply the brakes if your foot is resting on the accelerator pedal. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you.
Curves in the Road
{ Warning
On curves, ACC may not detect a vehicle ahead in your lane. You could be startled if the vehicle accelerates up to the set speed, especially when following a vehicle exiting or entering exit ramps. You
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
could lose control of the vehicle or crash. Do not use ACC while driving on an entrance or exit ramp. Always be ready to use the brakes if necessary.
{ Warning
On curves, ACC may respond to a vehicle in another lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle in your lane. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you, or lose control of your vehicle. Give extra attention in curves and be ready to use the brakes if necessary. Select an appropriate speed while driving in curves.
ACC may operate differently in a sharp curve. It may reduce the vehicle speed if the curve is too sharp.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 201
If equipped, the curve speed control
indicator b may illuminate green
when ACC is actively controlling the vehicle speed and detects a sharp curve on the road ahead.

When following a vehicle and entering a curve, ACC may not detect the vehicle ahead and accelerate to the set speed. When this happens, the vehicle ahead indicator will not appear.

ACC may detect a vehicle that is not in your lane and apply the brakes.
ACC may occasionally provide an alert and/or braking that is considered unnecessary. It could respond to vehicles in different lanes, signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects when entering or exiting a curve. This is normal operation. The vehicle does not need service.

202 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

Driving in Narrow Lanes

Vehicles in adjacent traffic lanes or roadside objects may be incorrectly detected when located along the roadway.

Do Not Use ACC on Hills and When Towing a Trailer

ACC will not detect a vehicle ahead until it is completely in the lane. The brakes may need to be manually applied.
Objects Not Directly in Front of Your Vehicle
The detection of objects in front of the vehicle may not be possible if:
. The vehicle or object ahead is not within your lane.
. The vehicle ahead is shifted, not centered, or is shifted to one side of the lane.

Do not use ACC when driving on steep hills or when towing a trailer. ACC will not detect a vehicle in the lane while driving on steep hills. If the brakes are applied, ACC disengages.
Disengaging ACC
There are three ways to disengage ACC:
. Step lightly on the brake pedal
. Press *

. Press J
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is erased
from memory if J is pressed or if the
ignition is turned off.
Cleaning the Sensing System
The camera sensor on the windshield behind the rearview mirror can become blocked by snow, ice, dirt, mud, or debris. This area needs to be cleaned for ACC to operate properly.
The vehicle headlamps may need to be cleaned due to dirt, snow, or ice. Objects that are not illuminated correctly may be difficult to detect.
If ACC will not operate, regular cruise control may be available. See "Switching Between ACC and Regular Cruise Control" previously in this section. Always consider driving conditions before using either cruise control system.
For cleaning instructions, see "Washing the Vehicle" under Exterior Care 0 293.

Driver Assistance Systems
This vehicle may be equipped with driver assistance system that operate using radio frequency. See Radio Frequency Statement 0 331.
This vehicle may have features that work together to help avoid crashes or reduce crash damage while driving, backing, and parking. Read this entire section before using these systems.
{ Warning
Do not rely on the Driver Assistance Systems. These systems do not replace the need for paying attention and driving safely. You may not hear or feel alerts or warnings provided by these systems. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. See Defensive Driving 0 143.
(Continued)

DRIVING AND OPERATING 203

Warning (Continued)
Under many conditions, these systems will not:
. Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
. Detect vehicles or objects outside the area monitored by the system.
. Work at all driving speeds.
. Warn you or provide you with enough time to avoid a crash.
. Work under poor visibility or bad weather conditions.
. Work if the detection sensor is not cleaned or is covered by ice, snow, mud, or dirt.
. Work if the detection sensor is covered up, such as with a sticker, magnet, or metal plate.
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
. Work if the area surrounding the detection sensor is damaged or not properly repaired.
Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes.
Audible or Safety Alert Seat
Some driver assistance features alert the driver of obstacles by beeping. To change the volume of the warning chime, see "Comfort and Convenience" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
If equipped with the Safety Alert Seat, the driver seat cushion may provide a vibrating pulse alert instead of beeping. To change this, see "Collision/Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116.

204 DRIVING AND OPERATING
Cleaning Depending on vehicle options, keep these areas of the vehicle clean to ensure the best driver assistance feature performance. Driver Information Center (DIC) messages may display when the systems are unavailable or blocked.
. Front and rear bumpers and the area below the bumpers
. Front grille and headlamps . Front camera lens in the front
grille or near the front emblem . Front side and rear side panels . Outside of the windshield in front
of the rearview mirror . Side camera lens on the bottom of
the outside mirrors . Rear side corner bumpers . Rear Vision Camera above the
license plate

Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing
If equipped, the Rear Vision Camera (RVC), Rear Park Assist (RPA), Front Park Assist (FPA), Backing Warning and Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB), and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) may help the driver park or avoid objects. Always check around the vehicle when parking or backing.
Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
When the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse), the RVC displays an image of the area behind the vehicle in the infotainment display. The previous screen displays when the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) after a short delay. To return to the previous screen sooner, press any button on the infotainment system, shift into P (Park), or, while in D (Drive), reach a vehicle speed of approximately 12 km/h (8 mph).

1. View Displayed by the Camera
1. View Displayed by the Camera
2. Corners of the Rear Bumper

DRIVING AND OPERATING

Displayed images may be farther or closer than they appear. The area displayed is limited and objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper do not display.

Camera Views

A warning triangle may display to show that RPA has detected an object. This triangle changes from amber to red and increases in size the closer the object.

205

{ Warning
The camera(s) do not display children, pedestrians, bicyclists, crossing traffic, animals, or any other object outside of the cameras' field of view, below the bumper, or under the vehicle. Shown distances may be different from actual distances. Do not drive or park the vehicle using only these camera(s). Always check behind and around the vehicle before driving. Failure to use proper care may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage.

Touch the camera view buttons along the bottom of the infotainment display.
Front/Rear Standard View : Displays an image of the area in front or behind the vehicle. Touch Front/Rear Standard View on the infotainment display when a camera view is active. Touching the button multiple times will toggle between front and rear camera views.
If equipped, the front view camera also displays when the Park Assist system detects an object within 30 cm (12 in).

206 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Front/Rear Junction View : Displays a front or rear cross traffic view that shows objects directly to the left and right of the front or back of the vehicle. Touch Junction View on the infotainment display when a camera view is active. Touching the button multiple times will toggle between front and rear camera views.
Front/Rear Overhead View : Displays a front or rear overhead view of the vehicle. Touching the button will toggle between the two views.
Front/Rear Bowl View : Displays a view of the vehicle from either the front or the back of the vehicle. Touch Bowl View on the infotainment display when a camera view is active. Touching the button multiple times will toggle between forward and rearward views. Rear Pedestrian Alert, Park Assist, and RCTA are not available when Bowl view is active.
Side Forward/Rearward View : Displays a view that shows objects next to the front or rear sides of the vehicle. Touch Side Forward/Rearward View on the infotainment display when a camera view is active.

Touching the button multiple times will toggle between forward and rearward views. Rear Pedestrian Alert, Park Assist, and RCTA are not available when Side Forward/Rearward view is active.
Guidance Lines : Displays available guidelines. The horizontal markings represent distance from the vehicle.
Top Down View : Displays an image of the area surrounding the vehicle, along with the rear camera view in the infotainment display. The rear camera view will be replaced by the front camera view after shifting from R (Reverse) to a forward gear or when the vehicle is moving forward slower than 12 km/h (8 mph). This view can also be accessed by touching the Top Down View button when the CAMERA view is active.
Park Assist
The vehicle may be equipped with the Rear Park Assist (RPA) and Front Park Assist (FPA). The Park Assist system may provide assistance to driver when backing up and parking. Park Assist uses ultrasonic sensors in the

bumpers to measure the distance between the vehicle and objects. The system calculates the distance between vehicle and object via measuring the time it takes for the ultrasonic waves to bounce back from the object. Park Assist works only at speeds up to about 11 Km/h (7 mph). An illuminated LED in the parking assist button indicates that the system is ready to operate. The sensors on the bumpers may detect objects up to 1.8m (6 ft) behind and 1.25m (4 ft) in front of the vehicle within a zone 25 cm (10 in) high off the ground and below bumper level. These detection distances may be shorter during warmer or humid weather. Blocked sensors will not detect objects and can also cause false detections. Keep the sensors clean of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush; and clean sensors after a car wash in freezing temperatures.

{ Warning
The Park Assist System is no substitute for careful and attentive driving. The Park Assist system does not detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, or objects located below the bumper or that are too close or too far from the vehicle. It is not available at speeds greater than 11 km/h (7 mph). To prevent injury, death, or vehicle damage, even with Park Assist, always check the area around the vehicle and check all mirrors before moving forward or backing.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 207

How the System Works
The instrument cluster may have a Park Assist display with bars that show "distance to object," driving direction, and object location information for the Park Assist system. As the object gets closer, more bars light up and the bars change color from yellow to amber to red.
When an object is very close to the vehicle rear (<0.6m (2 ft)), five beeps will sound from the rear followed by a continuous beep from the rear, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. When an object is very close to the vehicle front (<0.3m (1 ft)), a continuous beep will sound from the front, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. Beeps for FPA are higher pitched than for RPA.
When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly
The following messages may be displayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST : If this message occurs, check the following conditions:
. The sensors are not clean. Keep the vehicle's rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush. For cleaning instructions, see Exterior Care 0 293.
. The Park Assist sensors are covered by frost or ice. Frost or ice can form around and behind the sensors and may not always be seen; this can occur after washing the vehicle in cold weather. The message may not clear until the frost or ice has melted.
If the above conditions do not exist, take the vehicle to your dealer to repair the system.
PARK ASSIST OFF : If the PA system does not activate due to a temporary condition, the message displays on the DIC. This can occur under the following conditions:
. The driver has disabled the system.

208 DRIVING AND OPERATING

. An object was hanging out of the trunk during the last drive cycle. Once the object is removed, RPA will return to normal operation.
. The bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle to your dealer to repair the system.
. Other conditions, such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck, are affecting system performance.
Backing Warning and Reverse Automatic Braking
Vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) have the Backing Warning System and Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system. The Backing Warning part of this system can warn of rear objects when backing up at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph).
The Backing Warning System will beep once from the rear when an object is first detected, or pulse twice on both sides of the Safety Alert Seat. When the system detects a potential crash, beeps will be heard from the rear, or five pulses will be felt on both

sides of the Safety Alert Seat. There may also be a brief, sharp application of the brakes.
{ Warning
The Backing Warning System only operates at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). It does not detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, or objects below the bumper or that are too close or too far from the vehicle. In some situations, such as at higher backing speeds, there may not be enough time for the short, sharp application of the vehicle brake system to occur. To prevent injury, death, or vehicle damage, even with the Backing Warning System, always check the area around the vehicle and check all mirrors before backing.
When the vehicle is in R (Reverse) and the system detects the vehicle is backing too fast to avoid a crash with a detected object behind your vehicle in your path, it may automatically

brake hard to a stop to help avoid or reduce the harm caused by a backing crash.
{ Warning
RAB may not avoid many types of backing crashes. Do not wait for the automatic braking to apply. This system is not designed to replace driver braking and only works in R (Reverse) when an object is detected directly behind the vehicle. It may not brake or stop in time to avoid a crash. It will not brake for objects when the vehicle is moving at very low speeds. It does not detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, or objects below the bumper or that are too close or too far from the vehicle. To prevent injury, death, or vehicle damage, even with RAB, always check the area around the vehicle before and while backing.

If the brake pedal is not pressed soon after the stop, the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) may be set. When it is safe, press the accelerator pedal firmly at any time to override RAB.
{ Warning
There may be instances where unexpected or undesired automatic braking occurs. If this happens, either press the brake pedal or firmly press the accelerator pedal to release the brakes from the RAB system. Before releasing the brakes, check the RVC and check the area around the vehicle to make sure it is safe to proceed.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
If equipped, RCTA displays a red warning triangle with a left or right pointing arrow to warn of traffic coming from the left or right. This system detects objects coming from up to 20 m (65 ft) from the left or right side of the vehicle. When an object is detected, either three beeps sound from the left or right or three

DRIVING AND OPERATING 209

Safety Alert Seat pulses occur on the left or right side, depending on the direction of the detected vehicle.
Use caution while backing up when towing a trailer, as the RCTA detection zones that extend out from the back of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed.
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 331.
Turning the Features On or Off
Touch X on the center stack to turn
on or off the Front and Rear Park Assist, Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB), and the Backing Warning System at the same time. The indicator light next to the button comes on when the features are on and turns off when the features have been disabled.

RCTA can also be turned on or off through vehicle personalization. See "Collision/Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
Rear Pedestrian Alert
Under certain conditions, this feature can provide alerts for a pedestrian within the system's range directly behind the vehicle. This feature only works in R (Reverse) below 12 km/h (8 mph), and detects pedestrians up to 8 m (26 ft) away during daytime driving. During nighttime driving, feature performance is very limited.

Turn off Park Assist, RCTA, and RAB when towing a trailer.
To turn the RPA symbols or guidance lines (on some models) on or off, see "Rear Camera Park Assist Symbols" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116.

Rear Pedestrian Alert Indicator
When a pedestrian is detected within the system's range directly behind the vehicle, this symbol flashes amber on the infotainment display, along with two beeps from the rear, or if equipped, two pulses from both sides of the driver seat. When a pedestrian

210 DRIVING AND OPERATING

is detected close to the vehicle, the symbol flashes red on the infotainment display, along with seven beeps from the rear, or if equipped, seven pulses from both sides of the driver seat.
{ Warning
Rear Pedestrian Alert does not automatically brake the vehicle. It also does not provide an alert unless it detects a pedestrian, and it may not detect all pedestrians if:
. The pedestrian is not directly behind the vehicle, fully visible to the Rear Vision Camera (RVC), or standing upright.
. The pedestrian is part of a group.
. The pedestrian is a child.
. Visibility is poor, including nighttime conditions, fog, rain, or snow.
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
. The RVC is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.
. The RVC, taillamps, or back-up lamps are not cleaned or in proper working condition.
. The vehicle is not in R (Reverse).
To help avoid death or injury, always check for pedestrians around the vehicle before backing up. Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving 0 143. Keep the RVC, taillamps, and back-up lamps clean and in good repair.
Rear Pedestrian Alert can be set to Off or Alert. See "Rear Pedestrian Detection" in "Collision/Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116. If equipped, alerts can be set to beeps or seat pulses. See "Alert Type" in "Collision/Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116.

Assistance Systems for Driving
If equipped, when driving the vehicle in a forward gear, Forward Collision Alert (FCA), Lane Departure Warning (LDW), Lane Keep Assist (LKA), Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA), Lane Change Alert (LCA), Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB), and/or the Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System can help to avoid a crash or reduce crash damage.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System
If equipped, the FCA system may help to avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes. When approaching a vehicle ahead too quickly, FCA provides a red flashing alert on the windshield and rapidly beeps or pulses the driver seat. FCA also lights an amber visual alert if following another vehicle too closely.
FCA detects vehicles within a distance of approximately 60 m (197 ft) and operates at speeds above 8 km/h (5 mph). If the vehicle is equipped

with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), the FCA timing setting can only be changed while ACC is not engaged. See Adaptive Cruise Control 0 194.
{ Warning
FCA is a warning system and does not apply the brakes. When approaching a slower-moving or stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly, or when following a vehicle too closely, FCA may not provide a warning with enough time to help avoid a crash. It also may not provide any warning at all. FCA does not warn of pedestrians, animals, signs, guardrails, bridges, construction barrels, or other objects. Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving 0 143.
FCA can be disabled with either the FCA steering wheel control or, if equipped, through vehicle personalization. See "Collision/ Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

DRIVING AND OPERATING 211 Warning (Continued)

FCA warnings will not occur unless the FCA system detects a vehicle ahead. When a vehicle is detected, the vehicle ahead indicator will display green. Vehicles may not be detected on curves, highway exit ramps, or hills, due to poor visibility; or if a vehicle ahead is partially blocked by pedestrians or other objects. FCA will not detect another vehicle ahead until it is completely in the driving lane.

also not detect a vehicle on winding or hilly roads, or in conditions that can limit visibility such as fog, rain, or snow, or if the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition. Keep the windshield, headlamps, and FCA sensors clean and in good repair.
Collision Alert

{ Warning
FCA does not provide a warning to help avoid a crash, unless it detects a vehicle. FCA may not detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the windshield is damaged. It may
(Continued)

With Head-Up Display

212 DRIVING AND OPERATING
The vehicle ahead indicator will display amber when you are following a vehicle ahead too closely.
Selecting the Alert Timing

Without Head-Up Display
When your vehicle approaches another detected vehicle too rapidly, the red FCA display will flash on the windshield. Also, eight rapid high-pitched beeps will sound from the front, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. When this Collision Alert occurs, the brake system may prepare for driver braking to occur more rapidly which can cause a brief, mild deceleration. Continue to apply the brake pedal as needed. Cruise control may be disengaged when the Collision Alert occurs.
Tailgating Alert

The Collision Alert control is on the
steering wheel. Press [ to set the
FCA timing to Far, Medium, or Near, or on some vehicles, Off. The first button press shows the current setting on the DIC. Additional button presses will change this setting. The chosen setting will remain until it is changed and will affect the timing of both the Collision Alert and the Tailgating Alert features. The timing of both alerts will vary based on vehicle speed.

The faster the vehicle speed, the farther away the alert will occur. Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting the alert timing. The range of selectable alert timings may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions.
If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), the FCA timing setting can only be changed while (ACC) is not engaged. See Adaptive Cruise Control.
Following Distance Indicator
The following distance to a moving vehicle ahead in your path is indicated in following time in seconds on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 109. The minimum following time is 0.5 seconds away. If there is no vehicle detected ahead, or the vehicle ahead is out of sensor range, dashes will be displayed.
Unnecessary Alerts
FCA may provide unnecessary alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles in other lanes, objects that are not vehicles,

or shadows. These alerts are normal operation and the vehicle does not need service.
Cleaning the System
If the FCA system does not seem to operate properly, this may correct the issue:
. Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror.
. Clean the entire front of the vehicle.
. Clean the headlamps.
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
If the vehicle has Forward Collision Alert (FCA), it also has AEB, which includes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA). When the system detects a vehicle ahead in your path that is traveling in the same direction that you may be about to crash into, it can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle. This can help avoid or lessen the severity of crashes when driving in a forward gear. Depending

on the situation, the vehicle may automatically brake moderately or hard. This automatic emergency braking can only occur if a vehicle is detected. This is shown by the FCA vehicle ahead indicator being lit. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 210.
The system works when driving in a forward gear between 8 km/h (5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph), or on vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), above 4 km/h (2 mph). It can detect vehicles up to approximately 60 m (197 ft).

{ Warning

AEB is an emergency crash preparation feature and is not designed to avoid crashes. Do not rely on AEB to brake the vehicle. AEB will not brake outside of its operating speed range and only responds to detected vehicles.

AEB may not:

(Continued)

DRIVING AND OPERATING 213
Warning (Continued)
. Detect a vehicle ahead on winding or hilly roads.
. Detect all vehicles, especially vehicles with a trailer, tractors, muddy vehicles, etc.
. Detect a vehicle when weather limits visibility, such as in fog, rain, or snow.
. Detect a vehicle ahead if it is partially blocked by pedestrians or other objects.
Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes.
AEB may slow the vehicle to a complete stop to try to avoid a potential crash. If this happens, AEB may engage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop. Release the EPB or firmly press the accelerator pedal.

214 DRIVING AND OPERATING

{ Warning
AEB may automatically brake the vehicle suddenly in situations where it is unexpected and undesired. It could respond to a turning vehicle ahead, guardrails, signs, and other non-moving objects. To override AEB, firmly press the accelerator pedal, if it is safe to do so.
Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)
IBA may activate when the brake pedal is applied quickly by providing a boost to braking based on the speed of approach and distance to a vehicle ahead.
Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the brake pedal should continue to be applied as needed. IBA will automatically disengage only when the brake pedal is released.

{ Warning
IBA may increase vehicle braking in situations when it may not be necessary. You could block the flow of traffic. If this occurs, take your foot off the brake pedal and then apply the brakes as needed.
AEB and IBA can be disabled through vehicle personalization. See "Collision/ Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
{ Warning
Using AEB or IBA while towing a trailer could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and crash. Turn the system to Alert, or if the vehicle has ACC to Off, when towing a trailer.
A system unavailable message may display if: . The front of the vehicle or
windshield is not clean.

. Heavy rain or snow is interfering with object detection.
. There is a problem with the StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
The AEB system does not need service.
Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System
If equipped, the FPB system may help avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes with nearby pedestrians when driving in a forward gear. FPB displays an amber
indicator, ~, when a nearby
pedestrian is detected ahead. When approaching a detected pedestrian too quickly, FPB provides a red flashing alert on the windshield and rapidly beeps or pulses the driver seat. FPB can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle. This system includes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA), and the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) System may

also respond to pedestrians. See Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) 0 213.
The FPB system can detect and alert to pedestrians in a forward gear at speeds between 8 km/h (5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph). During daytime driving, the system detects pedestrians up to a distance of approximately 40 m (131 ft). During nighttime driving, system performance is very limited. If the vehicle is equipped with the Night Vision system, during nighttime driving, the vehicle can detect and alert to pedestrians whenever in a forward gear.
{ Warning
FPB does not provide an alert or automatically brake the vehicle, unless it detects a pedestrian. FPB may not detect pedestrians, including children:
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
. When the pedestrian is not directly ahead, fully visible, or standing upright, or when part of a group.
. Due to poor visibility, including nighttime conditions, fog, rain, or snow.
. If the FPB sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.
. If the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition.
Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. For more information, see Defensive Driving 0 143. Keep the windshield, headlamps, and FPB sensor clean and in good repair.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 215 Detecting the Pedestrian Ahead
FPB alerts and automatic braking will not occur unless the FPB system detects a pedestrian. When a nearby pedestrian is detected in front of the vehicle, the pedestrian ahead indicator will display amber. Front Pedestrian Alert

FPB can be set to Off, Alert, or Alert & Brake through vehicle personalization. See "Front Pedestrian Detection" in "Collision/Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116.

With Head-Up Display

216 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Without Head-Up Display
When the vehicle approaches a pedestrian ahead too rapidly, the red FPB alert display will flash on the windshield. Eight rapid high-pitched beeps will sound from the front, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. When this Pedestrian Alert occurs, the brake system may prepare for driver braking to occur more rapidly which can cause a brief, mild deceleration. Continue to apply the brake pedal as needed. Cruise control may be disengaged when the Front Pedestrian Alert occurs.
Automatic Braking
If FPB detects it is about to crash into a pedestrian directly ahead, and the brakes have not been applied, FPB may automatically brake moderately or brake hard. This can help to avoid

some very low speed pedestrian crashes or reduce pedestrian injury. FPB can automatically brake to detected pedestrians between 8 km/h (5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph). Automatic braking levels may be reduced under certain conditions, such as higher speeds. If also equipped with the Night Vision system, pedestrians detected by the Night Vision system will not cause automatic braking to occur.
If this happens, Automatic Braking may engage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop. Release the EPB. A firm press of the accelerator pedal will also release Automatic Braking and the EPB.
{ Warning
FPB may alert or automatically brake the vehicle suddenly in situations where it is unexpected and undesired. It could falsely alert or brake for objects similar in shape or size to pedestrians, including shadows. This is normal operation
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
and the vehicle does not need service. To override Automatic Braking, firmly press the accelerator pedal, if it is safe to do so.
Automatic Braking can be disabled through vehicle personalization. See "Front Pedestrian Detection" in "Collision/Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116.
{ Warning
Using the Front Pedestrian Braking system while towing a trailer could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and crash. Turn the system to Alert or Off when towing a trailer.
Cleaning the System
If FPB does not seem to operate properly, cleaning the outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror may correct the issue.

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
If equipped, the SBZA system is a lane-changing aid that assists drivers with avoiding crashes that occur with moving vehicles in the side blind zone (or spot) areas. When the vehicle is in a forward gear, the left or right side mirror display will light up if a moving vehicle is detected in that blind zone. If the turn signal is activated and a vehicle is also detected on the same side, the display will flash as an extra warning not to change lanes. Since this system is part of the Lane Change Alert (LCA) system, read the entire LCA section before using this feature.
Lane Change Alert (LCA)
If equipped, the LCA system is a lane-changing aid that assists drivers with avoiding lane change crashes that occur with moving vehicles in the side blind zone (or spot) areas or with vehicles rapidly approaching these areas from behind. The LCA warning display will light up in the corresponding outside mirror and will flash if the turn signal is on.

{ Warning
LCA does not alert the driver to vehicles outside of the system detection zones, pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. It may not provide alerts when changing lanes under all driving conditions. Failure to use proper care when changing lanes may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. Before making a lane change, always check mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn signals.
LCA Detection Zones
1. SBZA Detection Zone 2. LCA Detection Zone

DRIVING AND OPERATING 217
The LCA sensor covers a zone of approximately one lane over from both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m (11 ft). The height of the zone is approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. The Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) warning area starts at approximately the middle of the vehicle and goes back 5 m (16 ft). Drivers are also warned of vehicles rapidly approaching from up to 70 m (230 ft) behind the vehicle.
How the System Works
The LCA symbol lights up in the outside mirrors when the system detects a moving vehicle in the next lane over that is in the side blind zone or rapidly approaching that zone from behind. A lit LCA symbol indicates it may be unsafe to change lanes. Before making a lane change, check the LCA display, check mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn signals.

218 DRIVING AND OPERATING

When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly

Left Outside Mirror Right Outside

Display

Mirror Display

When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror LCA displays will briefly come on to indicate the system is operating. When the vehicle is in a forward gear, the left or right outside mirror display will light up if a moving vehicle is detected in the next lane over in that blind zone or rapidly approaching that zone. If the turn signal is activated in the same direction as a detected vehicle, this display will flash as an extra warning not to change lanes.
LCA can be disabled. When you disable LCA, Side Blind Zone Alert is also disabled. See "Collision/Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 116. If LCA is disabled by the driver, the LCA mirror displays will not light up.

The LCA system requires some driving for the system to calibrate to maximum performance. This calibration may occur more quickly if the vehicle is driving on a straight highway road with traffic and roadside objects (e.g., guardrails, barriers).
LCA displays may not come on when passing a vehicle quickly, for a stopped vehicle, or when towing a trailer. The LCA detection zones that extend back from the side of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed. Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer. LCA may alert to objects attached to the vehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle, or object extending out to either side of the vehicle. Attached objects may also interfere with the detection of vehicles. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service.
LCA may not always alert the driver to vehicles in the next lane over, especially in wet conditions or when driving on sharp curves. The system

does not need to be serviced. The system may light up due to guardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other non-moving objects. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service.
LCA may not operate when the LCA sensors in the left or right corners of the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning instructions, see "Washing the Vehicle" under Exterior Care 0 293. If the DIC still displays the system unavailable message after cleaning both sides of the vehicle toward the rear corners of the vehicle, see your dealer.
If the LCA displays do not light up when moving vehicles are in the side blind zone or are rapidly approaching this zone and the system is clean, the system may need service. Take the vehicle to your dealer.
Radio Frequency Information
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 331.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
If equipped, LKA may help avoid crashes due to unintentional lane departures. This system uses a camera to detect lane markings between 60 km/h (37 mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph). It may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking. It may also provide a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert if the vehicle crosses a detected lane marking. LKA can be overridden by turning the steering wheel. This system is not intended to keep the vehicle centered in the lane. LKA will not assist and alert if the turn signal is active in the direction of lane departure, or if it detects that you are accelerating, braking or actively steering.
{ Warning
The LKA system does not continuously steer the vehicle. It may not keep the vehicle in the
(Continued)

DRIVING AND OPERATING 219

Warning (Continued)
lane or give a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert, even if a lane marking is detected.
The LKA and LDW systems may not:
. Provide an alert or enough steering assist to avoid a lane departure or crash.
. Detect lane markings under poor weather or visibility conditions. This can occur if the windshield or headlamps are blocked by dirt, snow, or ice; if they are not in proper condition; or if the sun shines directly into the camera.
. Detect road edges.
. Detect lanes on winding or hilly roads.
If LKA only detects lane markings on one side of the road, it will only assist or provide an LDW alert
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
when approaching the lane on the side where it has detected a lane marking. Even with LKA and LDW, you must steer the vehicle. Always keep your attention on the road and maintain proper vehicle position within the lane, or vehicle damage, injury, or death could occur. Always keep the windshield, headlamps, and camera sensors clean and in good repair. Do not use LKA in bad weather conditions or on roads with unclear lane markings, such as construction zones.
{ Warning
Using LKA while towing a trailer or on slippery roads could cause loss of control of the vehicle and a crash. Turn the system off.

220 DRIVING AND OPERATING

How the System Works
LKA uses a camera sensor installed on the windshield ahead of the rearview mirror to detect lane markings. It may provide brief steering assist if it detects an unintended lane departure. It may further provide an audible alert or the driver seat may pulse indicating that a lane marking has been crossed.
To turn LKA on and off, press A on
the center stack. If equipped, the indicator light on the button comes on when LKA is on and turns off when LKA is disabled.
When on, A is white, if equipped,
indicating that the system is not ready
to assist. A is green if LKA is ready
to assist. LKA may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane
marking. A is amber when
assisting. It may also provide a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert by
flashing A amber if the vehicle
crosses a detected lane marking. Additionally, there may be three beeps, or the driver seat may pulse

three times, on the right or left, depending on the lane departure direction.
Take Steering
The LKA system does not continuously steer the vehicle. If LKA does not detect active driver steering, an alert and chime may be provided. Steer the vehicle to dismiss. LKA may become temporarily unavailable after repeated take steering alerts.
When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly
The system performance may be affected by:
. Close vehicles ahead.
. Sudden lighting changes, such as when driving through tunnels.
. Banked roads.
. Roads with poor lane markings, such as two-lane roads.
If the LKA system is not functioning properly when lane markings are clearly visible, cleaning the windshield may help.

A camera blocked message may display if the camera is blocked. Some driver assistance systems may have reduced performance or not work at all. An LKA or LDW unavailable message may display if the systems are temporarily unavailable. This message could be due to a blocked camera. The LKA system does not need service. Clean the outside of the windshield behind the rearview mirror.
LKA assistance and/or LDW alerts may occur due to tar marks, shadows, cracks in the road, temporary or construction lane markings, or other road imperfections. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service. Turn LKA off if these conditions continue.

Fuel
Top Tier Fuel
GM recommends the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline to keep the engine clean, reduce engine deposits, and maintain optimal vehicle performance. Look for the TOP TIER Logo or see www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline marketers and applicable countries.

Recommended Fuel (LSY 2.0L L4 Turbo Engine)

DRIVING AND OPERATING 221
Do not use any fuel labeled E85 or FlexFuel. Do not use gasoline with ethanol levels greater than 15% by volume.
Recommended Fuel (L3B 2.7L L4 Turbo Engine)

Premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM specification D4814 with a posted octane rating of 93 -- (R+M)/2 -- is highly recommended for best performance and fuel economy. Unleaded gasoline with an octane rated as low as 87 can be used. Using unleaded gasoline rated below 93 octane, however, will lead to reduced acceleration and fuel economy. If knocking occurs, use a gasoline rated at 93 octane as soon as possible, otherwise, the engine could be damaged. If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline with a 93 octane rating, the engine needs service.

Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM specification D4814 with a posted octane rating of 93 -- (R+M)/2. If unavailable, unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 may be used, but with reduced performance and fuel economy. If the octane is less than 91, the engine could be damaged and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at 93 octane, the engine needs service.

222 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Do not use any fuel labeled E85 or FlexFuel. Do not use gasoline with ethanol levels greater than 15% by volume.
Prohibited Fuels
Caution
Do not use fuels with any of the following conditions; doing so may damage the vehicle and void its warranty:
. For vehicles that are not FlexFuel, fuel labeled greater than 15% ethanol by volume, such as mid-level ethanol blends (16­50% ethanol), E85, or FlexFuel.
. Fuel with any amount of methanol, methylal, ferrocene, and aniline. These fuels can corrode metal fuel system parts or damage plastic and rubber parts.
(Continued)

Caution (Continued)
. Fuel containing metals such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT), which can damage the emissions control system and spark plugs.
. Fuel with a posted octane rating of less than the recommended fuel. Using this fuel will lower fuel economy and performance, and may decrease the life of the emissions catalyst.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
The U.S., Canada, and Mexico post fuel octane ratings in anti-knock index (AKI). For fuel not to use in a foreign country, see Prohibited Fuels 0 222.
Fuel Additives
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is highly recommended for use with your vehicle. If your country does not have TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, add

ACDelco Fuel System Treatment Plus -Gasoline to the vehicle's gasoline fuel tank at every oil change or 15 000 km (9,000 mi), whichever occurs first. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline and ACDelco Fuel System Treatment Plus-Gasoline will help keep your vehicle's engine fuel deposit free and performing optimally.
Filling the Tank
An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel door is on. See Fuel Gauge 0 96.
{ Warning
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn violently and can cause injury or death.
Follow these guidelines to help avoid injuries to you and others:
. Read and follow all the instructions on the fuel pump island.
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
. Turn off the engine when refueling.
. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended.
. Avoid using electronic devices while refueling.
. Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel.
. Keep children away from the fuel pump and never let children pump fuel.
. Before touching the fill nozzle, touch a metallic object to discharge static electricity from your body.
. Fuel can spray out if the fill nozzle is inserted too quickly. This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.
(Continued)

DRIVING AND OPERATING 223

Warning (Continued)
Insert the fill nozzle slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop before beginning to flow fuel.

{ Warning
Overfilling the fuel tank by more than three clicks of a standard fill nozzle may cause:
. Vehicle performance issues, including engine stalling and damage to the fuel system.
. Fuel spills.
. Under certain conditions, fuel fires.

To open the fuel door, push and release the rearward center edge of the door.
The capless refueling system does not have a fuel cap. Fully insert and latch the fill nozzle, begin fueling.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait five seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the fill nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Exterior Care 0 293. Push the fuel door closed until it latches.
{ Warning
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the fill nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
(Continued)

224 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Warning (Continued)
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Filling the Tank with a Portable Fuel Container If the vehicle runs out of fuel and must be filled from a portable fuel container:

{ Warning
Attempting to refuel from a portable fuel container without using the funnel adapter may cause fuel spillage and damage the capless fuel system. This could cause a fire. You or others could be badly burned and the vehicle could be damaged.
3. Remove and clean the funnel adapter and return it to the storage location.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container

1. Locate the capless funnel adapter.
2. Insert and latch the funnel into the capless fuel system.

{ Warning
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You or others could be badly
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
burned and the vehicle could be damaged. To help avoid injury to you and others:
. Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
. Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, in a pickup bed, or on any surface other than the ground.
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Maintain contact until filling is complete.
. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
. Do not use electronic devices while pumping fuel.

Trailer Towing
General Towing Information
Only use towing equipment that has been designed for the vehicle. Contact your dealer or trailering dealer for assistance with preparing the vehicle to tow a trailer. Read the entire section before towing a trailer. To tow a disabled vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle 0 291. To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle such as a motor home, see Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 293.
When towing with the 2.0L L4 engine, only use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 89 or higher. Using gasoline with a lower octane rating while towing may damage the engine and may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. See Recommended Fuel (LSY 2.0L L4 Turbo Engine) 0 221 or Recommended Fuel (L3B 2.7L L4 Turbo Engine) 0 221.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 225

Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips

Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.

{ Warning
You can lose control when towing a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too heavy or the trailer brakes are inadequate for the load, the vehicle may not stop as expected. You and others could be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be damaged, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Driving with a Trailer
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability, and fuel economy.

The following information has many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. Read this section carefully before pulling a trailer.
When towing a trailer:
. Become familiar with and follow all state and local laws that apply to trailer towing. These requirements vary from state to state.
. State laws may require the use of extended side view mirrors. Even if not required, you should install extended side view mirrors if your visibility is limited or restricted while towing.
. Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 mi) of vehicle use to prevent damage to the engine, axle, or other parts.
. It is recommended to perform the first oil change before heavy towing.

226 DRIVING AND OPERATING

. During the first 800 km (500 mi) of trailer towing, do not drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and do not make starts at full throttle.
. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). If the transmission downshifts too often, a lower gear may be selected using Manual Mode. See Manual Mode (Electronic Shifter) 0 177 or Manual Mode (Mechanical Shifter) 0 176.
If equipped, the following driver assistance features should be turned off when towing a trailer:
. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)
. Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)
If equipped with Lane Change Alert (LCA), the LCA detection zones that extend back from the side of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed. Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer.
If equipped with Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA), use caution while backing up when towing a trailer, as the RCTA detection zones that extend out from the back of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed.

. Super Cruise Control
. Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
. Park Assist
. Automatic Parking Assist (APA)
. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
If equipped, the following driver assistance features should be turned to alert or off when towing a trailer:
. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

{ Warning
To prevent serious injury or death from carbon monoxide (CO), when towing a trailer:
. Do not drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window open.
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.
. Adjust the climate control system to a setting that brings in only outside air. See "Climate Control Systems" in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust 0 168.
Towing a trailer requires experience. The combination of the vehicle and trailer is longer and not as responsive as the vehicle itself. Get used to the handling and braking of the combination by driving on a level road surface before driving on public roads.
The trailer structure, the tires, and the brakes must be all be rated to carry the intended cargo. Inadequate trailer equipment can cause the combination to operate in an unexpected or unsafe manner. Before driving, inspect all trailer hitch parts and attachments,

safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, tires, and mirrors. See Towing Equipment 0 230. If the trailer has electric brakes, start the combination moving and then manually apply the trailer brake controller to check the trailer brakes work. During the trip, occasionally check that the cargo and trailer are secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are working.
Towing with a Stability Control System
When towing, the stability control system might be heard. The system reacts to vehicle movement caused by the trailer, which mainly occurs during cornering. This is normal when towing heavier trailers.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving without a trailer. This can help to avoid heavy braking and sudden turns.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 227

Passing
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer. The combination of the vehicle and trailer will not accelerate as quickly and is much longer than the vehicle alone. It is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane. Pass on level roadways. Avoid passing on hills if possible.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. To move the trailer to the left, move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move that hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns

Caution (Continued)
Making very sharp turns could cause the trailer to contact the vehicle.
Make wider turns than normal when towing, so trailer will not go over soft shoulders, over curbs, or strike road signs, trees, or other objects. Always signal turns well in advance. Do not steer or brake suddenly.
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downhill grade. If the transmission is not shifted down, the brakes may overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

Caution
Turn more slowly and make wider arcs when towing a trailer to prevent damage to your vehicle.
(Continued)

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
When towing at higher altitudes, engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at lower altitudes. If the engine is turned off immediately

228 DRIVING AND OPERATING

after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, the vehicle could show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run, preferably on level ground, with the transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes before turning the engine off. If the overheat warning comes on, see Engine Overheating 0 250.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, gradually release the brake pedal to allow the chocks to absorb the load of the trailer.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.

Parking on Hills
{ Warning
To prevent serious injury or death, always park your vehicle and trailer on a level surface when possible.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
. Start the engine. . Shift into a gear. . Release the parking brake. 2. Let up on the brake pedal.

When parking your vehicle and your trailer on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance when Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when used to tow trailers. See Maintenance Schedule 0 303. It is especially important to check the

automatic transmission fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system, and brake system before and during each trip.
Check periodically that all nuts and bolts on the trailer hitch are tight.
Engine Cooling when Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating 0 250.
Trailer Towing
Caution
Towing a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. To tow a trailer correctly, follow the directions in this section and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle.

Trailer Weight
{ Warning
Never exceed the towing capacity for your vehicle.
Safe trailering requires monitoring the weight, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature, dimensions of the front of the trailer, and how frequently the vehicle is used to tow a trailer.
Before towing a trailer, always separately weigh: . the total weight on the vehicle's
tires. . the trailer. . the trailer tongue.
{ Warning
You and others could be seriously injured or killed if the trailer is too heavy or the trailer brakes are inadequate for the load. The vehicle
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
may be damaged, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Only tow a trailer if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
For information about the vehicle's maximum load capacity, see Vehicle Load Limits 0 154. When calculating the GVWR with a trailer attached, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the weight the vehicle is carrying.
Maximum Trailer Weight
The trailer should never weigh more than 454 kg (1,000 lb). The maximum allowable weight of the trailer may be lower based on the weight of the passengers and cargo in your trailer.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 229
The maximum trailer weight rating is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional equipment, passengers, and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Trailer Load Balance
The correct trailer load balance must be maintained to ensure trailer stability. Incorrect load balance is a leading cause of trailer sway.

230 DRIVING AND OPERATING

The trailer tongue weight (1) should be 10­15% of the loaded trailer weight (2). Some specific trailer types, such as boat trailers, fall outside of this range. Always refer to the trailer owner's manual for the recommended trailer tongue weight for each trailer. Never exceed the maximum loads for your vehicle, hitch, and trailer.

If a cargo carrier is used in the trailer hitch receiver, choose a carrier that positions the load as close to the vehicle as possible. Make sure the total weight, including the carrier, is no more than half of the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle or 227 kg (500 lb), whichever is less.

After loading the trailer, separately weigh the trailer and then the trailer tongue and calculate the trailer load balance percentage to see if the weights and distribution are appropriate for your vehicle. If the trailer weight is too high, it may be possible to transfer some of the cargo into your vehicle. If the trailer tongue weight is too high or too low, it may be possible to rearrange some of the cargo inside of the trailer.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle. Use the shortest hitch extension available to position the hitch ball closer to your vehicle. This will help reduce the effect of the trailer tongue weight on the trailer hitch and the rear axle.

Ask your dealer for trailering information or assistance.
Towing Equipment
Hitches
Always use the correct hitch equipment for your vehicle. Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads can affect the trailer and the hitch.
Never attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches. Only use frame-mounted hitches that do not attach to the bumper.
Always seal any holes in your vehicle if the trailer hitch removed. If not sealed, dirt, water, and carbon

monoxide (CO) from the exhaust may enter your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust 0 168.
Consider using mechanical sway controls with any trailer. Ask a trailering professional about sway controls or refer to the trailer manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
Tires
. Do not tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire on the vehicle.
. Tires must be properly inflated to support loads while towing a trailer. See Tires 0 267 for instructions on proper tire inflation.
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer, and attach the chains to the holes on the trailer hitch platform. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.

Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so the combination can turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
Loaded trailers over 450 kg (1,000 lb) must be equipped with brake systems and with brakes for each axle. Trailer braking equipment conforming to Canadian Standards Association (CSA) requirement CAN3-D313, or its equivalent, is recommended.
State or local regulations may require trailers to have their own braking system if the loaded weight of the trailer exceeds certain minimums that can vary from state to state. Read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed, adjusted, and maintained properly. Never attempt to tap into your vehicle's hydraulic brake system. If you do, both the vehicle anti-lock brakes and the trailer brakes may not function, which could result in a crash.

DRIVING AND OPERATING 231

Trailer Lamps
Always check all trailer lamps are working at the beginning of each trip, and periodically on longer trips.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical Equipment

When properly connected, the trailer turn signals will illuminate to indicate the vehicle is turning, changing lanes, or stopping. When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument cluster will illuminate even if the trailer is not properly connected or the bulbs are burned out.

{ Warning
The Data Link Connector (DLC) is used for vehicle service and Emission Inspection/Maintenance testing. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light) 0 100. A device connected to the DLC -- such as an aftermarket fleet or driver-behavior tracking device -- may interfere with vehicle systems. This could affect vehicle operation and cause a crash. Such devices may also access information stored in the vehicle's systems.

232 DRIVING AND OPERATING
Caution
Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle or cause components to not work and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 61 and Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 61.

Vehicle Care
General Information General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Vehicle Checks Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Engine Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Automatic Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . 245 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Battery - North America . . . . . . . . . 254 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . 256 Windshield Replacement . . . . . . . . 257 Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Headlamp Aiming Front Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . 258
Bulb Replacement Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . 259
Electrical System Electrical System Overload . . . . . . 259 Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . 260 Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . 262 Rear Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Wheels and Tires Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Run-Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

VEHICLE CARE 233
Self-Sealing Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Tire Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . 277 Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 284 Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Jump Starting Jump Starting - North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

234 VEHICLE CARE
Towing the Vehicle Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 293
Appearance Care Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

General Information
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer. You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

California Proposition 65 Warning
{ Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, as well as many of its service parts and fluids, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many fluids, and some component wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/ passenger-vehicle.
See Battery - North America 0 254 and Jump Starting - North America 0 288 and the back cover.

California Perchlorate Materials Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries contained in electronic keys, may contain perchlorate materials. Perchlorate Material ­ special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate.
Accessories and Modifications
Adding non-dealer accessories or making modifications to the vehicle can affect vehicle performance and safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. These accessories or modifications could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to suspension components caused by modifying vehicle height outside of factory settings will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components resulting from modifications or the installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including control module or software modifications, is not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle. See your dealer to accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories installed by a dealer technician.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 61.

VEHICLE CARE 235
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own Service Work
{ Warning
It can be dangerous to work on your vehicle if you do not have the proper knowledge, service manual, tools, or parts. Always follow owner's manual procedures and consult the service manual for your vehicle before doing any service work.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Publication Ordering Information 0 330.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 61.

236 VEHICLE CARE
If equipped with remote vehicle start, open the hood before performing any service work to prevent remote starting the vehicle accidentally. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 14.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed. See Maintenance Records 0 316.
Caution
Even small amounts of contamination can cause damage to vehicle systems. Do not allow contaminants to contact the fluids, reservoir caps, or dipsticks.
Hood
{ Warning
For vehicles with auto engine stop/ start, turn the vehicle off before opening the hood. If the vehicle is on, the engine will start when the hood is opened. You or others could be injured.

{ Warning
Components under the hood can get hot from running the engine. To help avoid the risk of burning unprotected skin, never touch these components until they have cooled, and always use a glove or towel to avoid direct skin contact.
Clear any snow from the hood before opening.
To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release lever with
the i symbol. It is on the
lower left side of the instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and locate the secondary release lever under the front center of the hood. Push the secondary hood release lever to the right to release.

3. Lift the hood and release the hood prop rod from its retainer in the front of the engine compartment. Securely insert the rod end into the slot marked with an arrow, on the underside of the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly, and all tools are removed.
2. Lift the hood and remove the hood prop rod from the underside of the hood. Return the prop rod to its retainer. The

prop rod must click into place when returning it to the retainer to prevent hood damage.
3. Lower the hood 20 cm (8 in) above the vehicle and release it. Check to make sure the hood is latched completely. Repeat this process with additional force if necessary.
{ Warning
Do not drive the vehicle if the hood is not latched completely. The hood could open fully, block your vision, and cause a crash. You or others could be injured. Always close the hood completely before driving.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a message if the hood is not fully closed.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the hood for obstructions, and close the hood again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.

VEHICLE CARE 237

238 VEHICLE CARE Engine Compartment Overview
2.0L L4 Engine

1. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Washer Fluid 0 252.
2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System 0 246.
3. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 245.
4. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View). See Cooling System 0 246.
5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil 0 241.
6. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil 0 241.
7. Remote Positive (+) Battery Terminal. See Jump Starting North America 0 288.
8. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brake Fluid 0 253.
9. Remote Negative (-) Battery Terminal. See Jump Starting North America 0 288.
10. Engine Compartment Fuse Block 0 260.

VEHICLE CARE 239

240 VEHICLE CARE
2.7L L4 Engine

1. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Washer Fluid 0 252.
2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System 0 246.
3. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 245.
4. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View). See Cooling System 0 246.
5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil 0 241.
6. Cooling System Air Bleeder Cap. See Cooling System 0 246.
7. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil 0 241.
8. Remote Positive (+) Battery Terminal. See Jump Starting North America 0 288.
9. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brake Fluid 0 253.
10. Remote Negative (-) Battery Terminal. See Jump Starting North America 0 288.
11. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine Compartment Fuse Block 0 260.

Engine Oil
To ensure proper engine performance and long life, careful attention must be paid to engine oil. Following these simple, but important steps will help protect your investment:
. Use engine oil approved to the proper specification and of the proper viscosity grade. See "Selecting the Right Engine Oil" in this section.
. Check the engine oil level regularly and maintain the proper oil level. See "Checking Engine Oil" and "When to Add Engine Oil" in this section.
. Change the engine oil at the appropriate time. See Engine Oil Life System 0 243.
. Always dispose of engine oil properly. See "What to Do with Used Oil" in this section.
Checking Engine Oil
Check the engine oil level regularly, every 650 km (400 mi), especially prior to a long trip. The engine oil dipstick

VEHICLE CARE 241
handle is a loop. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 238 for the location.
{ Warning
The engine oil dipstick handle may be hot; it could burn you. Use a towel or glove to touch the dipstick handle.
If a low oil Driver Information Center (DIC) message displays, check the oil level.
Follow these guidelines:
. To get an accurate reading, park the vehicle on level ground. Check the engine oil level after the engine has been off for at least two hours. Checking the engine oil level on steep grades or too soon after engine shutoff can result in incorrect readings. Accuracy improves when checking a cold engine prior to starting. Remove the dipstick and check the level.

242 VEHICLE CARE
. If unable to wait two hours, the engine must be off for at least 15 minutes if the engine is warm, or at least 30 minutes if the engine is not warm. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it with a clean paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil

Caution
Do not add too much oil. Oil levels above or below the acceptable operating range shown on the dipstick are harmful to the engine. If the oil level is above the operating range (i.e., the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range), the engine could be damaged. Drain the excess oil or limit driving of the vehicle, and seek a service professional to remove the excess oil.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Selecting the right engine oil depends on both the proper oil specification and viscosity grade. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 313.
Specification
Use full synthetic engine oils that meet the dexos1 specification. Engine oils that have been approved by GM as meeting the dexos1 specification are marked with the dexos1 approved logo. See www.gmdexos.com.

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick and the engine has been off for at least 15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil and then recheck the level. See "Selecting the Right Engine Oil" later in this section for an explanation of what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications 0 318.

See Engine Compartment Overview 0 238 for the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when finished.

Caution
Failure to use the recommended engine oil or equivalent can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

Viscosity Grade
For the LSY 2.0L L4 turbo engine, use SAE 0W-20 viscosity grade engine oil.
For the L3B 2.7L L4 turbo engine, use SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade engine oil. Cold Temperature Operation: In an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below -29 °C (-20 °F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be used. An oil of this viscosity grade will provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures.
When selecting an oil of the appropriate viscosity grade, it is recommended to select an oil of the correct specification. See "Specification" earlier in this section.
Engine Oil Additives/Engine Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils meeting the dexos1 specification are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash or pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.

VEHICLE CARE 243
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on a combination of factors which include engine revolutions, engine temperature, and miles driven. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on. Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might indicate that an oil change is not necessary for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has trained service

244 VEHICLE CARE
people who will perform this work and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly over the course of an oil drain interval and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) since the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System
Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next engine oil change. To reset the system:
1. Using the DIC buttons, display REMAINING OIL LIFE on the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 109.
2. Press and hold the thumbwheel to clear the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message and reset the oil life at 100%.
Be careful not to reset the oil life display accidentally at any time other than after the oil is

changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change.
The oil life system can also be reset as follows:
1. Using the DIC buttons, display REMAINING OIL LIFE on the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 109.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message is not on, the system is reset.
The system is reset when the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message is off.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system has not been reset. Repeat the procedure.

Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer and have it repaired as soon as possible.
The vehicle is not equipped with a transmission fluid level dipstick. There is a special procedure for checking and changing the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is difficult, this should be done at the dealer. Contact your dealer for additional information.
Caution
Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damage may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use the correct automatic
(Continued)

Caution (Continued)
transmission fluid. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 313.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Maintenance Schedule 0 303, and be sure to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 313.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 238.
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
For intervals on inspecting and replacing the engine air cleaner/filter, see Maintenance Schedule 0 303.

How to Inspect/Replace the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Do not start the engine or have the engine running with the engine air cleaner/filter housing open. Before removing the engine air cleaner/filter, make sure that the engine air cleaner/ filter housing and nearby components are free of dirt and debris.
Do not clean the engine air cleaner/ filter or components with water or compressed air.
To inspect or replace the air cleaner/ filter:

VEHICLE CARE 245
2.0L L4 Engine Shown, 2.7L L4 Engine Similar
1. Remove the five screws on top of the air cleaner/filter cover.
2. Lift the air/cleaner/filter cover away from the air cleaner/filter housing.
3. Pull out the air cleaner/filter. 4. Inspect or replace the air
cleaner/filter. 5. Reverse Steps 1­3 to reinstall the
air cleaner/filter cover.

246 VEHICLE CARE
{ Warning
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. Use caution when working on the engine. Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle with the air cleaner/filter off, as flames may be present if the engine backfires.
Caution
If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily get into the engine, which could damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when driving.
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature.

2.0L L4 Engine
1. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
2. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)

2.7L L4 Engine
1. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
2. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)
3. Cooling System Air Bleeder Cap
{ Warning
An underhood electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

{ Warning
Do not touch heater or radiator hoses, or other engine parts. They can be very hot and can burn you. Do not run the engine if there is a leak; all coolant could leak out. That could cause an engine fire and can burn you. Fix any leak before driving the vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. See Maintenance Schedule 0 303 and Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 313.
The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating 0 250.

What to Use
{ Warning
Do not touch heater or radiator hoses, or other engine parts. They can be very hot and can burn you. Do not run the engine if there is a leak; all coolant could leak out. That could cause an engine fire and can burn you. Fix any leak before driving the vehicle.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. This mixture:
. Gives freezing protection down to -37 °C (-34 °F), outside temperature.
. Gives boiling protection up to 129 °C (265 °F), engine temperature.
. Protects against rust and corrosion.
. Will not damage aluminum parts.
. Helps keep the proper engine temperature.

VEHICLE CARE 247
Caution
Do not use anything other than a mix of DEX-COOL coolant that meets GM Standard GMW3420 and clean, drinkable water. Anything else can cause damage to the engine cooling system and the vehicle, which would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Never dispose of engine coolant by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, or into sewers, streams, or bodies of water. Have the coolant changed by an authorized service center, familiar with legal requirements regarding used coolant disposal. This will help protect the environment and your health.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level.

248 VEHICLE CARE
It is normal to see coolant moving in the upper coolant hose return line when the engine is running. It is also normal to see bubbles entering the surge tank through the small hose.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.

Be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done.
If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank, add coolant as follows:
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank
{ Warning
Spilling coolant on hot engine parts can burn you. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.

If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the indicated mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant.

{ Warning
Plain water, or other liquids such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. With plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but there would not be an overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned.

{ Warning
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system are under pressure. Turning the pressure cap, even a little, can cause them to come out at high speed and you could be burned. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and pressure cap to cool.
Caution
Failure to follow the specific coolant fill procedure could cause the engine to overheat and could cause system damage. If coolant is not visible in the surge tank, contact your dealer.
If no problem is found, check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the indicated mark, add a 50/50 mixture

of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it.
2.0L L4 Engine Automatic Coolant Service Fill Instructions The vehicle is equipped with a service feature that assists with filling and removing air from the cooling system after service of components or when coolant is added after being to low. To use this feature:

1. With a cold system, add coolant to the indicated line on the surge tank.
2. Replace the pressure cap on the surge tank.
3. Activate the service feature:
3.1. Connect the vehicle to a battery charger.
3.2. Turn the ignition to Service Mode. See Ignition Positions 0 158.
3.3. Turn off the air conditioning.
3.4. Set the parking brake.

VEHICLE CARE 249
3.5. At the same time, press the accelerator and the brake pedal for two seconds, then release.
3.6. At the end of the cycle, check the coolant level in the surge tank and add coolant if it is below the indicated line. Turn the ignition off, allow the Electronic Control Module (ECM) to go to sleep, about two minutes, and repeat Steps 3.2 ­ 3.6.
Listen for pump activation and movement of the control valves while watching the level of the coolant in the surge tank. If the tank empties, turn the ignition off, carefully remove the pressure cap, refill to the indicated line, replace the pressure cap, and repeat steps 3.2 ­ 3.6.
The fill and air removal process will run for approximately 15 minutes.

250 VEHICLE CARE
Caution
If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
2.7L L4 Engine
Automatic Coolant Service Fill Instructions
The vehicle is equipped with a service feature that assists with filling and removing air from the cooling system after service of components or when coolant is added after being to low.
To use this feature:
1. With a cold system unscrew the cooling system air bleeder cap. If coolant can be seen through the bleeder move to Step 3.
2. Add coolant through the surge tank until it is visible through the air bleeder.
3. Replace the cooling system air bleeder cap.

4. Add coolant to the indicated line on the surge tank.
5. Replace the pressure cap on the surge tank.
6. Activate the service feature:
6.1. Connect the vehicle to a battery charger.
6.2. Turn the ignition to Service Mode. See Ignition Positions 0 158.
6.3. Turn off the air conditioning.
6.4. Set the parking brake.
6.5. At the same time, press the accelerator and the brake pedal for two seconds, then release.
6.6. At the end of the cycle, check the coolant level in the surge tank and add coolant if it is below the indicated line. Turn the ignition off, carefully remove the pressure cap, refill to the indicated line, replace the pressure cap, and repeat steps 6.2 ­ 6.6.

Listen for pump activation and movement of the control valves while watching the level of the coolant in the surge tank. If the tank empties, turn the ignition off, carefully remove the pressure cap, refill to the indicated line, replace the pressure cap, and repeat steps 6.2 ­ 6.6.
The fill and air removal process will run for approximately 15 minutes.
Caution
If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has an indicator to warn of the engine overheating.
If the decision is made not to lift the hood when this warning appears, get service help right away. See Roadside Service 0 325.

If the decision is made to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fan is running. If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If it is not, do not continue to run the engine. Have the vehicle serviced.
Caution
Do not run the engine if there is a leak in the engine cooling system. This can cause a loss of all coolant and can damage the system and vehicle. Have any leaks fixed right away.
If Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment
{ Warning
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system are under pressure. Turning the pressure cap,
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
even a little, can cause them to come out at high speed and you could be burned. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and pressure cap to cool.
If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle:
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
. Stops after high-speed driving.
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.

VEHICLE CARE 251
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as necessary.
3. When it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the engine idle.
If the overheat warning no longer displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle slowly for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance from the vehicle in front. If the warning does not come back on, continue to drive normally and have the cooling system checked for proper fill and function.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.

252 VEHICLE CARE Washer Fluid What to Use
When windshield washer fluid is needed, be sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use. If operating the vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 238 for reservoir location.

Caution
. Do not use washer fluid that contains any type of water repellent coating. This can cause the wiper blades to chatter or skip.
. Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the windshield washer. It can damage the windshield washer system and paint.
. Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage the washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system.
. When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer instructions for adding water.
. Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing
(Continued)

Caution (Continued)
occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.
Brakes
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the time when the vehicle is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly.
{ Warning
The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to a crash. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced.

Caution
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
If equipped with high performance brake linings, there could be an increased build-up of brake dust as well as minor noises as compared to standard brake linings.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications. See Capacities and Specifications 0 318.
Brake pads should be replaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service may be required.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Always replace brake system parts with new, approved replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes may not work properly. The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed or parts are improperly installed.
Brake Fluid

VEHICLE CARE 253
The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with GM approved DOT 3 brake fluid as indicated on the reservoir cap. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 238 for the location of the reservoir.
Checking Brake Fluid
With the vehicle in P (Park) on a level surface, the brake fluid level should be between the minimum and maximum marks on the brake fluid reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir may go down:
. Normal brake lining wear. When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes back up.
. A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed. With a leak, the brakes will not work well.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when

254 VEHICLE CARE
new brake linings are installed. Add or remove fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{ Warning
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and the vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning Light 0 102.
Brake fluid absorbs water over time which degrades the effectiveness of the brake fluid. Replace brake fluid at the specified intervals to prevent increased stopping distance. See Maintenance Schedule 0 303.

What to Add Use only GM approved DOT 3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 313.
{ Warning
The wrong or contaminated brake fluid could result in damage to the brake system. This could result in the loss of braking leading to a possible injury. Always use the proper GM approved brake fluid.
Caution
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Immediately wash off any painted surface.
Battery - North America
The original equipment battery is maintenance free. Do not remove the cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement number shown on the original battery label when a new battery is needed.
The vehicle has an Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) 12-volt battery. Installation of a standard 12-volt battery will result in reduced 12-volt battery life.
When using a 12-volt battery charger on the 12-volt AGM battery, some chargers have an AGM battery setting on the charger. If available, use the AGM setting on the charger, to limit charge voltage to 14.8 volts. Follow the charger manufacturer's instructions.
Stop/Start System
This vehicle has a Stop/Start system to shut off the engine to help conserve fuel. See Stop/Start System 0 161.

{ Warning
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/ passenger-vehicle.
See California Proposition 65 Warning 0 234 and the back cover.
Vehicle Storage
{ Warning
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
careful. See Jump Starting - North America 0 288 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (-) cable from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (-) cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
All-Wheel Drive
If the vehicle is equipped with All-Wheel-Drive (AWD), this is an additional system that needs lubrication.
Transfer Case
Under normal driving conditions, transfer case fluid does not require maintenance unless there is a fluid leak or unusual noise. If required, have the transfer case serviced by your dealer.

VEHICLE CARE 255
Starter Switch Check
{ Warning
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer for service.

256 VEHICLE CARE
Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check
{ Warning
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake.
. To check the parking brake's holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is required.
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear and cracking. See Maintenance Schedule 0 303.
Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For proper type and length, see Maintenance Replacement Parts 0 314.
Caution
Allowing the wiper arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not allow the wiper arm to touch the windshield.

To replace the windshield wiper blade: 1. Pull the windshield wiper
assembly away from the windshield.
2. Lift up on the latch in the middle of the wiper blade where the wiper arm attaches.
3. With the latch open, pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield far enough to release it from the J-hooked end of the wiper arm.
4. Remove the wiper blade. 5. Reverse Steps 1­3 for wiper
blade replacement.

Windshield Replacement
HUD System
The windshield is part of the HUD system. If the windshield needs to be replaced, be sure to get one that is designed for HUD or the HUD image may look out of focus.
Driver Assistance Systems
If the windshield needs to be replaced and the vehicle is equipped with a front camera sensor for the Driver Assistance Systems, a GM replacement windshield is recommended. The replacement windshield must be installed according to GM specifications for proper alignment. If it is not, these systems may not work properly, they may display messages, or they may not work at all. See your dealer for proper windshield replacement.
Acoustic Windshield
The vehicle is equipped with an acoustic windshield. If the windshield needs to be replaced be sure to get an

acoustic windshield so you will continue to have the benefits an acoustic windshield can provide.
Gas Strut(s)
This vehicle is equipped with gas strut(s) to provide assistance in lifting and holding open the hood/trunk/ liftgate system in full open position.
{ Warning
If the gas struts that hold open the hood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail, you or others could be seriously injured. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service immediately. Visually inspect the gas struts for signs of wear, cracks, or other damage periodically. Check to make sure the hood/trunk/liftgate is held open with enough force. If struts are failing to hold the hood/trunk/ liftgate, do not operate. Have the vehicle serviced.

VEHICLE CARE 257 Caution
Do not apply tape or hang any objects from gas struts. Also do not push down or pull on gas struts. This may cause damage to the vehicle. See Maintenance Schedule 0 303.
Hood

258 VEHICLE CARE
Trunk Liftgate

Headlamp Aiming
Front Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset and should need no further adjustment.
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the headlamp aim may be affected. If adjustment to the headlamps is necessary, see your dealer.

Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, or any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer.
Caution
Do not replace incandescent bulbs with aftermarket LED replacement bulbs. This can cause damage to the vehicle electrical system.
Halogen Bulbs
{ Warning
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting
{ Warning
The High Intensity Discharge (HID) lighting system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to service any of the system components, you could be seriously injured. Have your dealer or a qualified technician service them.
After an HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, the beam might be a slightly different shade than it was originally. This is normal.
LED Lighting
This vehicle has several LED lamps. For replacement of any LED lighting assembly, contact your dealer.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
Uplevel
See your dealer for turn signal replacement.

Base level To replace one of these lamps: 1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the headlamp assembly.
3. Unplug the electrical connector from the bulb by releasing the clip on the connector.
4. Replace the bulb and reverse Steps 1­3 to reinstall.

VEHICLE CARE 259
Electrical System
Electrical System Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit breakers to protect against an electrical system overload.
When the current electrical load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the current load returns to normal or the problem is fixed. This greatly reduces the chance of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical problems.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect power devices in the vehicle.
Replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.
If there is a problem on the road and a fuse needs to be replaced, the same amperage fuse can be borrowed. Choose some feature of the vehicle that is not needed to use and replace it as soon as possible.

260 VEHICLE CARE
Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. Have the headlamp wiring checked right away if the lamps go on and off or remain off.
Windshield Wipers
If the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice, the windshield wipers will stop. Wiper function is available immediately after the wiper switch is set to off, and back to on.
To protect the wiper motor from overheating, the wipers may slow down when the windshield is dry for a long period of time. If a period of dry operation, or little moisture, exceeds 10 minutes, the wipers may switch to intermittent operation, and remain there. When moisture is again detected on the windshield, wiper operation will return to the operator selected speed.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow or ice may cause wiper

linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using the windshield wipers.
If the overload is caused by an electrical problem and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electrical problems.
{ Danger
Fuses and circuit breakers are marked with their ampere rating. Do not exceed the specified amperage rating when replacing fuses and circuit breakers. Use of an oversized fuse or circuit breaker can result in a vehicle fire. You and others could be seriously injured or killed.

To check a fuse, look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure to replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can be temporarily borrowed from another fuse location, if a fuse goes out. Replace the fuse as soon as possible.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is on the passenger side of the engine compartment.

VEHICLE CARE 261

Lift the fuse block cover to access the fuses. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown.
Caution
Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component.

Fuses 1 2 3 4

Usage
Long range radar front sensor
Park/Daytime running lamps
Exterior lighting module 4
Exterior lighting module 7

Fuses 5 6 7
8 9 10 11

Usage Headlamp level ­ Electronic brake control module Washer pump ­ ­ ­

262 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses 12 13 14
15
16
17
18 19 20 21
22 23
24 25

Usage
Horn
Front wiper
Exterior lighting module 6
Exterior lighting module 1
Exterior lighting module 5
Exterior lighting module 3
Aero shutter
­
­
Virtual key system/ Power sounder module
­
Transmission control module
Active engine mount
­

Fuses 26
27 28 29
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Usage Engine control module Injectors/Ignition 2 Charged air cooler Transmission coolant pump Injectors/Ignition 1 Emissions 1 Emissions 2 Starter solenoid ­ Coolant pump Starter pinion AC clutch ­ ­ ­ ­ Water pump ­

Fuses

44

­

Usage

Relays 47 48 49 51 52
53 54 55 57 58

Usage ­ Front wiper speed Front wiper control ­ Engine control module Starter solenoid Starter pinion ­ AC clutch ­

Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse block is in the end of the driver side of the instrument panel.

To install the end cover, insert the tabs on the back of the cover into the slots in the instrument panel at the points shown. Align the clips with the slots in the instrument panel, and press the cover into place. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown.
To access the fuses, remove the end panel by gently prying with a plastic tool near each clip, beginning at the point shown.

VEHICLE CARE 263

264 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses 1 2 3 4 5

Usage
­
HVAC blower
­
­
Theft deterrent/ Universal garage door opener

Fuses 6 7 8 9 10
11 12

Usage ­ Air quality ionizer Heated steering wheel ­ Electronic steering column lock 1 ­ ­

Fuses 13 14 15 16 17 18
19
20
21 22 23 24 25 26

Usage
­
­
­
­
­
Display/ Infotainment/USB
Airbag/Automatic occupant sensing/ Data link connection/ Wireless charging module
Power steering column module/ Electronic steering column lock 2
­
­
­
­
USB
­

Fuses 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35
36 37
38 39

Usage
­
­
­
­
Headlamp level
­
Body ignition/IP ignition
Exhaust valve
Transmission control module ignition/ Engine control module ignition/Shift ignition/Brake ignition
Shift module
Body control module 1/Electronic park brake switch
Center stack module
Steering wheel controls

Fuses 40
41
42

Usage
Body control module 2
Body control module 3
Body control module 4

Circuit Breakers
CB1
CB2

Usage
Auxiliary power outlet 1 Auxiliary power outlet 2

Relays 1
2 3 4 5

Usage Run after park/ Accessory Run crank ­ ­ ­

VEHICLE CARE 265 Rear Compartment Fuse Block
The rear compartment fuse block is behind a cover on the driver side of the rear compartment. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown.

266 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses 1

Usage
Remote function actuator

Fuses 2
3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12 13 14 15
16 17

Usage
Engine control module
Driver heated seat
Fuel tank zone module
­
­
­
­
­
Motor seat belt passenger
Canister vent solenoid
Sunroof
­
­
Passenger heated seat
­
Electronic suspension control

Fuses 18 19 20 21
22
23
24
25 26 27
28 29 30 31

Usage
­
Motor seat belt driver
Rear defog
DC to DC transformer 2
Driver power window door lock switch
External object calculating module/ Front camera module
Passenger window door lock switch
­
Trailer
Rear drive control module
­
­
­
DC to DC transformer 1

Fuses 32
33
34
35
36
37
38 39
40 41 42 43 44
45

Usage
Transfer case electronic control
Central gateway module - side blind zone alert
Video processing module
Hands free closure release
Exterior lighting module 2
Passenger memory seat module
Trailer 2
Right front/Right rear window
­
­
Amplifier
Park assist module
Driver memory seat module
OnStar

Fuses 46 47 48 49 50 51
52
Relays 53 54 55

Usage ­ ­ ­ Trailer Driver seat Left front/Left rear window Passenger seat
Usage ­ ­ Run

VEHICLE CARE 267
Wheels and Tires
Tires
Every new GM vehicle has high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. See the warranty manual for information regarding the tire warranty and where to get service. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer.
{ Warning
. Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.
. Overloading the tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. There could be a blowout and a serious crash. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 154.
(Continued)

268 VEHICLE CARE
Warning (Continued)
. Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting crash could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when the tires are cold.
. Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden impact -- such as when hitting a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
. Worn or old tires can cause a crash. If the tread is badly worn, replace them.
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
. Replace any tires that have been damaged by impacts with potholes, curbs, etc.
. Improperly repaired tires can cause a crash. Only the dealer or an authorized tire service center should repair, replace, dismount, and mount the tires.
. Do not spin the tires in excess of 56 km/h (35 mph) on slippery surfaces such as snow, mud, ice, etc. Excessive spinning may cause the tires to explode.
See Tire Pressure for High-Speed Operation 0 276 for inflation pressure adjustment for high-speed driving.

All-Season Tires
This vehicle may come with all-season tires. These tires are designed to provide good overall performance on most road surfaces and weather conditions. Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. Original equipment all-season tires can be identified by the last two characters of this TPC code, which will be "MS."
Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on snow or ice-covered roads is expected. All-season tires provide adequate performance for most winter driving conditions, but they may not offer the same level of traction or performance as winter tires on snow or ice-covered roads. See Winter Tires 0 268.
Winter Tires
This vehicle was not originally equipped with winter tires. Winter tires are designed for increased traction on snow and ice-covered

roads. Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on ice or snow covered roads is expected. See your dealer for details regarding winter tire availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying New Tires 0 283.
With winter tires, there may be decreased dry road traction, increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After changing to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking.
If using winter tires:
. Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all four wheel positions.
. Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range, and speed rating as the original equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If winter tires with a lower speed rating are chosen, never exceed the tire's maximum speed capability.

Run-Flat Tires
This vehicle, when new, may have had run-flat tires. There is no spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and no place to store a tire in the vehicle.
The vehicle also has a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) that indicates a loss of tire pressure in any of the tires.
{ Warning
If the low tire warning light displays on the instrument cluster, the handling capabilities will be reduced during severe maneuvers. Driving too fast could cause loss of control and you or others could be injured. Do not drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) when the low tire warning light is displayed. Drive cautiously and check the tire pressures as soon as possible.
Run-flat tires can be driven up to 80 km (50 mi) at speeds less than 80km/h (50 mph) after a loss of inflation pressure has occurred. There

VEHICLE CARE 269
is no need to stop on the side of the road to change the tire. The possible driving range after a pressure loss will vary based on the vehicle load and driving conditions. As soon as possible, contact the nearest authorized GM or run-flat servicing facility for inspection and repair or replacement.
When driving on a deflated run-flat tire, avoid potholes and other road hazards that could damage the tire and/or wheel beyond repair. When a tire has been damaged, or driven any distance while deflated, check with an authorized run-flat tire service center to determine whether the tire can be repaired or should be replaced. To maintain the run-flat feature, all replacement tires must be run-flat tires.
To locate the nearest GM or run-flat servicing facility, call Customer Assistance.
Self-Sealing Tires
This vehicle may have self-sealing tires. These tires have a material inside that can seal punctures up to

270 VEHICLE CARE
6 mm (0.25 in) in the tread area. The tire may lose air pressure if the sidewall is damaged or the tread puncture is too large. If the Tire Pressure Monitor System indicates the tire pressure is low, inspect the tire for damage and inflate it to the recommended pressure. If the tire is unable to maintain the recommended pressure, contact the nearest authorized GM servicing facility immediately for inspection and repair or replacement. To locate the nearest GM servicing facility, call GM Customer Assistance.
Caution
Do not drive on a deflated self-sealing tire as this could damage the tire. Make sure the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure or have it immediately repaired or replaced.

When tire replacement is needed replace with a self-sealing tire, because the vehicle does not come with a spare tire or tire changing equipment.
Low-Profile Tires
If the vehicle has 225/45R17 91V, 235/40R18 91V, 235/40R18 XL 95Y, or 235/35R19 XL 91V size tires, they are classified as low-profile tires.
Caution
Low-profile tires are more susceptible to damage from road hazards or curb impact than standard profile tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can occur when coming into contact with road hazards like potholes, or sharp edged objects, or when sliding into a curb. The warranty does not cover this type of damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure and
(Continued)

Caution (Continued)
when possible, avoid contact with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
Summer Tires
High Performance Summer Tires
This vehicle may come with 225/ 45R17 SL 91V or 235/40R18 XL 95Y high performance summer tires. These tires have a special tread and compound that are optimized for maximum dry and wet road performance. This special tread and compound will have decreased performance in cold climates, and on ice and snow. It is recommended that winter tires be installed on the vehicle if frequent driving at temperatures below approximately 5 °C (40 °F) or on ice or snow covered roads is expected. See Winter Tires 0 268.

Caution
High performance summer tires have rubber compounds that lose flexibility and may develop surface cracks in the tread area at temperatures below -7 °C (20 °F). Always store high performance summer tires indoors and at temperatures above -7 °C (20 °F) when not in use. If the tires have been subjected to -7 °C (20 °F) or less, let them warm up in a heated space to at least 5 °C (40 °F) for 24 hours or more before being installed or driving a vehicle on which they are installed. Do not apply heat or blow heated air directly on the tires. Always inspect tires before use. See Tire Inspection 0 281.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall. The example shows a typical passenger tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(1) Tire Size : The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the "Tire Size" illustration later in this section.
(2) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code

VEHICLE CARE 271
molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.
(3) DOT (Department of Transportation) : The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
DOT Tire Date of Manufacture : The last four digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufactured date. The first two digits represent the week (01-52) and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third week of the year 2010 would have a four-digit DOT date of 0310.
(4) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters and numbers following the DOT code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The

272 VEHICLE CARE
TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(5) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(6) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) : Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading 0 284.
(7) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load.

Tire Designations
Tire Size The example shows a typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter "P" as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. (2) Tire Width : The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall. (3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.

For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item (3) of the illustration, it would mean that the tire's sidewall is 60 percent as high as it is wide.
(4) Construction Code : A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction.
(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(6) Service Description : These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire. The load index represents the load carrying capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure : The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in kPa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per square inch).
Accessory Weight : The combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission, power windows, power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio : The relationship of a tire's height to its width.
Belt : A rubber coated layer of cords between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead : The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure : The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in kPa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per square inch) before a tire has built up heat from driving. See Tire Pressure 0 275.
Curb Weight : The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings : A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator

VEHICLE CARE 273
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date of production.
GVWR : Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 154.
GAWR FRT : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 154.
GAWR RR : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 154.
Intended Outboard Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.

274 VEHICLE CARE
Load Index : An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure : The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating : The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight : The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight : The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load Limits 0 154.
Occupant Distribution : Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure : Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. See Tire Pressure 0 275 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 154.
Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall : The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating : An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.
Traction : The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread : The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators : Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires 0 282.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards) : A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature, and

treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Grading 0 284.
Vehicle Capacity Weight : The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated cargo load. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 154.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire : Load on an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard : A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. See "Tire and Loading Information Label" under Vehicle Load Limits 0 154.

Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively.
{ Warning
Neither tire underinflation nor overinflation is good. Underinflated tires, or tires that do not have enough air, can result in:
. Tire overloading and overheating, which could lead to a blowout.
. Premature or irregular wear.
. Poor handling.
. Reduced fuel economy.
Overinflated tires, or tires that have too much air, can result in:
. Unusual wear.
. Poor handling. (Continued)

VEHICLE CARE 275
Warning (Continued)
. Rough ride.
. Needless damage from road hazards.
The Tire and Loading Information label on the vehicle indicates the original equipment tires and the correct cold tire inflation pressures. The recommended pressure is the minimum air pressure needed to support the vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 154.
How the vehicle is loaded affects vehicle handling and ride comfort. Never load the vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check the pressure of your tires once a month or more.

276 VEHICLE CARE
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check the tire pressure. Proper tire inflation cannot be determined by looking at the tire. Check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold, meaning the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or no more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get the pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until the recommended pressure is reached. If the inflation pressure in high, press on the metal stem in the center of

the tire valve to release air. Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gauge.
Put the valve caps back on the valve stems to keep out dirt and moisture and prevent leaks. Use only valve caps designed for the vehicle by GM. TPMS sensors could be damaged and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Tire Pressure for High-Speed Operation
{ Warning
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher, puts additional strain on tires. Sustained high-speed driving causes excessive heat buildup and can cause sudden tire failure. This could cause a crash, and you or others could be killed. Some high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
adjustment for high-speed operation. When speed limits and road conditions allow the vehicle to be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are rated for high-speed operation, are in excellent condition, and are set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
Vehicles with 225/45R17 91V or 235/ 40R18 91V size tires require inflation pressure adjustment when driving the vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Set the cold tire inflation pressure to 280 kPa (41 psi).
Vehicles with 235/40R18 XL 95Y size tires require inflation pressure adjustment when driving the vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Set the cold tire inflation pressure to 340 kPa (49 psi).
Vehicles with 235/35R19 XL 91V size tires require inflation pressure adjustment when driving the vehicle

at speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Set the cold tire inflation pressure to 320 kPa (46 psi).
Sustained operation at speeds over 160 km/h (100 mph) requires a load limit of the driver and one passenger, with no additional cargo. When loaded above this level, up to the GVW, do not operate the vehicle above 160 km/h (100 mph).
Return the tires to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure when high-speed driving has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 154 and Tire Pressure 0 275.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the

inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to

VEHICLE CARE 277
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

278 VEHICLE CARE
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 278.
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 331.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the tires and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument cluster. If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 154.
A message to check the pressure in a specific tire displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC). The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed. For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 109.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as the vehicle is driven. This could be an early indicator that the air pressure is getting low and needs to be inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your vehicle, shows the size of the original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for the tires when they are cold. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 154, for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location. Also see Tire Pressure 0 275.
The TPMS can warn about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection 0 281, Tire Rotation 0 281 and Tires 0 267.
Caution
Tire sealant materials are not all the same. A non-approved tire sealant could damage the TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use only the GM approved tire sealant available through your dealer or included in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the system detects a malfunction, the low tire pressure warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message also displays. The malfunction light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause these to come on are:
. One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and DIC message should go off after the road tire is replaced and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See "TPMS Sensor Matching Process" later in this section.
. The TPMS sensor matching process was not done or not completed successfully after rotating the tires. The malfunction

light and the DIC message should go off after successfully completing the sensor matching process.
. One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See your dealer for service.
. Replacement tires or wheels do not match the original equipment tires or wheels. Tires and wheels other than those recommended could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. See Buying New Tires 0 283.
. Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning properly it cannot detect or signal a low tire pressure condition. See your

VEHICLE CARE 279
dealer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on and stays on.
Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)
This feature provides visual and audible alerts outside the vehicle to help when inflating an underinflated tire to the recommended cold tire pressure.
When the low tire pressure warning light comes on:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe, level place.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. Place the vehicle in P (Park).
4. Add air to the tire that is underinflated. The turn signal lamp will flash.
When the recommended pressure is reached, the horn sounds once and the turn signal lamp will stop flashing and briefly turn solid.

280 VEHICLE CARE
Repeat these steps for all underinflated tires that have illuminated the low tire pressure warning light.
{ Warning
Overinflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture and you or others could be injured. Do not exceed the maximum pressure listed on the tire sidewall. See Tire Sidewall Labeling 0 271 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 154.
If the tire is overinflated by more than 35 kPa (5 psi), the horn will sound multiple times and the turn signal lamp will continue to flash for several seconds after filling stops. To release and correct the pressure, while the turn signal lamp is still flashing, briefly press the center of the valve stem. When the recommended pressure is reached, the horn sounds once.

If the turn signal lamp does not flash within 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, the tire fill alert has not been activated or is not working.
If the hazard warning flashers are on, the tire fill alert visual feedback will not work properly.
The TPMS will not activate the tire fill alert properly under the following conditions:
. There is interference from an external device or transmitter.
. The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire.
. There is a malfunction in the TPMS.
. There is a malfunction in the horn or turn signal lamps.
. The identification code of the TPMS sensor is not registered to the system.
. The battery of the TPMS sensor is low.

If the tire fill alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 1 m (3 ft) back or forward and try again. If the tire fill alert feature is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process -- Auto Learn Function
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. The identification code needs to be matched to a new tire/wheel position after rotating the tires or replacing one or more of the TPMS sensors. When a tire is installed, the vehicle must be stationary for about 20 minutes before the system recalculates. The following relearn process takes up to 10 minutes, driving at a minimum speed of 20 km/h (12 mph). A dash (-) or pressure value will display in the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 109. A warning message displays in the DIC if a problem occurs during the relearn process.

Tire Inspection
We recommend that the tires, including the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, be inspected for signs of wear or damage at least once a month.
Replace the tire if:
. The indicators at three or more places around the tire can be seen.
. There is cord or fabric showing through the tire's rubber.
. The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
. The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
. The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.

Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See Maintenance Schedule 0 303.
Tires are rotated to achieve a uniform wear for all tires. The first rotation is the most important.
Anytime unusual wear is noticed, rotate the tires as soon as possible, check for proper tire inflation pressure, and check for damaged tires or wheels. If the unusual wear continues after the rotation, check the wheel alignment. See When It Is Time for New Tires 0 282 and Wheel Replacement 0 286.

VEHICLE CARE 281
Use this rotation pattern when rotating the tires. If the vehicle has a compact spare tire, do not include it in the tire rotation. Adjust the front and rear tires to the recommended inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label after the tires have been rotated. See Tire Pressure 0 275 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 154. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 278.

282 VEHICLE CARE
Check that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See "Wheel Nut Torque" under Capacities and Specifications 0 318.
{ Warning
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause a crash. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt.
Lightly coat the inner diameter of the wheel hub opening with wheel bearing grease after a wheel change or tire rotation to prevent corrosion or rust buildup. Do not

get grease on the wheel mounting surface or on the wheel nuts or bolts.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Factors such as maintenance, temperatures, driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions affect the wear rate of the tires.
Treadwear indicators are one way to tell when it is time for new tires. Treadwear indicators appear when the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or

less of tread remaining. See Tire Inspection 0 281 and Tire Rotation 0 281.
The rubber in tires ages over time. This also applies to the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, even if it is never used. Multiple factors including temperatures, loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance affect how fast aging takes place. GM recommends that tires, including the spare if equipped, be replaced after six years, regardless of tread wear. To identify the age of a tire, use the tire manufacture date which is the last four digits of the DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN) which is molded into one side of the tire sidewall. The first two digits represent the week (01­52) and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third week of the year 2010 would have a four-digit DOT date of 0310.
Vehicle Storage
Tires age when stored normally mounted on a parked vehicle. Park a vehicle that will be stored for at least a month in a cool, dry, clean area away from direct sunlight to slow

aging. This area should be free of grease, gasoline, or other substances that can deteriorate rubber.
Parking for an extended period can cause flat spots on the tires that may result in vibrations while driving. When storing a vehicle for at least a month, remove the tires or raise the vehicle to reduce the weight from the tires.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for the vehicle. The original equipment tires installed were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. When replacement tires are needed, GM strongly recommends buying tires with the same TPC Spec rating.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of the vehicle, including brake system

performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire pressure monitoring performance. GM's TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire's sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will be followed by MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling 0 271.
GM recommends replacing worn tires in complete sets of four. Uniform tread depth on all tires will help to maintain the performance of the vehicle. Braking and handling performance may be adversely affected if all the tires are not replaced at the same time. If proper rotation and maintenance have been done, all four tires should wear out at about the same time. See Tire Rotation 0 281. However, if it is necessary to replace only one axle set of worn tires, place the new tires on the rear axle.

VEHICLE CARE 283
Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. Never exceed the winter tires' maximum speed capability when using winter tires with a lower speed rating.
{ Warning
Tires could explode during improper service. Attempting to mount or dismount a tire could cause injury or death. Only your dealer or authorized tire service center should mount or dismount the tires.
{ Warning
Mixing tires of different sizes, brands, or types may cause loss of control of the vehicle, resulting in a crash or other
(Continued)

284 VEHICLE CARE
Warning (Continued)
vehicle damage. Use the correct size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.
{ Warning
Using bias-ply tires on the vehicle may cause the wheel rim flanges to develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly and cause a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
If the vehicle tires must be replaced with a tire that does not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction (radial) as the original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed. See Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 277.
The Tire and Loading Information label indicates the original equipment tires on the vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 154.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If wheels or tires are installed that are a different size than the original equipment wheels and tires, vehicle performance, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover may be affected. If the vehicle has electronic systems such as antilock brakes, rollover airbags, traction control, electronic stability control, or All-Wheel Drive, the performance of these systems can also be affected.

{ Warning
If different sized wheels are used, there may not be an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. This increases the chance of a crash and serious injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for the vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires 0 283 and Accessories and Modifications 0 235.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and temperature performance. This applies only to vehicles sold in the

United States. The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, winter tires, compact spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements In Addition To These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

VEHICLE CARE 285
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature

286 VEHICLE CARE
can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels were aligned and balanced at the factory to provide the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel

alignment and tire balancing are not necessary on a regular basis. Consider an alignment check if there is unusual tire wear or the vehicle is significantly pulling to one side or the other. Some slight pull to the left or right, depending on the crown of the road and/or other road surface variations such as troughs or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum wheels can be repaired. See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel that is needed.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors with new GM original equipment parts.
{ Warning
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of the vehicle. Tires can lose air, and cause loss of control, causing a crash. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Caution
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.

Used Replacement Wheels
{ Warning
Replacing a wheel with a used one is dangerous. How it has been used or how far it has been driven may be unknown. It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. When replacing wheels, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
{ Warning
If the vehicle has 235/40R18 or 235/35R19 size tires, do not use tire chains. There is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause loss of control and a crash. Use another
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for the vehicle's tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer's instructions. To avoid vehicle damage, drive slow and readjust or remove the traction device if it contacts the vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. If traction devices are used, install them on the rear tires.
Caution
If the vehicle is equipped with 225/ 45R17 size tires, use tire chains only where legal and only when necessary. Use low profile chains that add no more than 12 mm thickness to the tire tread and inner sidewall. Use chains that are the proper size for the tires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle.
(Continued)

VEHICLE CARE 287
Caution (Continued)
Don't use chains on the tires of the front axle. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. If the chains contact the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage the vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while driving, especially if the tires are maintained properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. See Tires 0 267 for additional information. But if there ever is a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering

288 VEHICLE CARE
wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction as used in a skid. Stop pressing the accelerator pedal and steer to straighten the vehicle. It may be very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.
The vehicle has no spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and no place to store a tire.
If the vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no need to stop on the side of the road to change a flat tire. See Run-Flat Tires 0 269.
{ Warning
Special tools and procedures are required to service a run-flat tire. If these special tools and procedures are not used, injury or vehicle damage may occur. Always
(Continued)

Warning (Continued)
be sure the proper tools and procedures, as described in the service manual, are used.
If the vehicle has self-sealing tires, see Self-Sealing Tires 0 269. Tread punctures typically will not cause tires to lose air. However, if the vehicle does get a flat tire, there is no spare tire, tire changing equipment, or place to store a tire. Contact Roadside Assistance for help.

Jump Starting
Jump Starting - North America
For more information about the vehicle battery, see Battery - North America 0 254.
If the battery has run down, try to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{ Warning
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/ passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition 65 Warning 0 234 and the back cover.
{ Warning
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:
. They contain acid that can burn you.
. They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
. They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.
Caution
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.

2.0L L4 Engine Shown, 2.7L L4 Engine Similar
1. Discharged Battery Remote Positive Terminal
2. Discharged Battery Negative Grounding Point
3. Good Battery Negative Terminal
4. Good Battery Positive Terminal
The jump start positive terminal (4) and negative post (3) are on the battery of the vehicle providing the jump start.

VEHICLE CARE 289
The jump start remote positive terminal (1) and the remote negative grounding point (2) for the discharged battery are on the passenger side of the vehicle.
The positive jump start connection for the discharged battery is under a cover. Lift the cover to expose the terminal.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Caution
If the other vehicle does not have a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. Only use a vehicle that has a 12-volt system with a negative ground for jump starting.
2. Position the two vehicles so that they are not touching.

290 VEHICLE CARE
3. Set the parking brake firmly and put the shift lever in P (Park) with an automatic transmission, or Neutral with a manual transmission.
Caution
If any accessories are left on or plugged in during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Whenever possible, turn off or unplug all accessories on either vehicle when jump starting.
4. Turn the ignition off. Turn off all lights and accessories in both vehicles, except the hazard warning flashers if needed.

{ Warning
An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
{ Warning
Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.

{ Warning
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.
5. Connect one end of the red positive (+) cable to the remote positive (+) terminal on the discharged battery.
6. Connect the other end of the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery.
7. Connect one end of the black negative (­) cable to the negative (­) terminal of the good battery.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (­) cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part.

8. Connect the other end of the black negative (­) cable to the negative (­) grounding point for the discharged battery.
9. Start the engine in the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine at idle speed for at least four minutes.
10. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
Caution
If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal.

Jumper Cable Removal
Reverse the sequence exactly when removing the jumper cables.
After starting the disabled vehicle and removing the jumper cables, allow it to idle for several minutes.

VEHICLE CARE 291
Towing the Vehicle
Caution
Incorrectly towing a disabled vehicle may cause damage. The damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not lash or hook to suspension components. Use the proper straps around the tires to secure the vehicle. Do not drag a locked wheel/tire. Use tire skates or dollies under any locked wheel/tire while loading the vehicle. Do not use a sling type lift to tow the vehicle. This could damage the vehicle.

292 VEHICLE CARE Front Tow Eye
Caution Improper use of the tow eye can damage the vehicle. If equipped, use the tow eye to load a disabled vehicle onto a flatbed tow truck from a flat road surface, or to move the vehicle a short distance. Use caution and low speeds. The transmission must be in (N) Neutral when moving the vehicle.

The vehicle is equipped with a tow eye. Only use the tow eye to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed car carrier from a flat road surface. Do not use the tow eye to pull the vehicle from snow, mud, or sand. The tow eye is located under the carpet in the trunk.
Carefully open the cover in the fascia by using the small notch that conceals the tow eye socket.
Install the tow eye into the socket and turn it until it is fully tightened. When the tow eye is removed, reinstall the cover with the notch in the original position.

Rear Tow Eye
If equipped, carefully open the cover by using the small notch that conceals the rear tow eye socket. Install the tow eye into the socket and turn it until it is fully tightened. When the tow eye is removed, reinstall the cover with the notch in the original position.

Recreational Vehicle Towing
Caution
Dolly towing or dinghy towing the vehicle may cause damage because of reduced ground clearance. Always put the vehicle on a flatbed truck or trailer.
The vehicle was neither designed nor intended to be towed with any of its wheels on the ground. If the vehicle must be towed, see Towing the Vehicle 0 291.

Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Locks
Locks are lubricated at the factory. Use a de-icing agent only when absolutely necessary, and have the locks greased after using. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 313.
Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle's finish, wash it often and out of direct sunlight.
Caution
Do not use petroleum-based, acidic, or abrasive cleaning agents as they can damage the vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic parts. If damage occurs, it would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. Follow all manufacturer directions regarding
(Continued)

VEHICLE CARE 293
Caution (Continued)
correct product usage, necessary safety precautions, and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product.
Caution
Avoid using high-pressure washes closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 8 274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Caution
Do not power wash any component
under the hood that has this e
symbol. This could cause damage that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

294 VEHICLE CARE
Caution
Some automatic car washes can cause damage to the vehicle, wheels and ground effects. Automatic car washes are not recommended, due to lack of clearance for the undercarriage and/or wide rear tires and wheels.
If using an automatic car wash, follow the car wash instructions. The windshield wiper and rear window wiper, if equipped, must be off. Remove any accessories that may be damaged or interfere with the car wash equipment.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after, to remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

Finish Care
Application of aftermarket clearcoat sealant/wax materials is not recommended. If painted surfaces are damaged, see your dealer to have the damage assessed and repaired. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Occasional hand waxing or mild polishing should be done to remove residue from the paint finish. See your dealer for approved cleaning products.
Do not apply waxes or polishes to uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, decals, simulated wood, or flat paint as damage can occur.

Caution
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/ clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle.
To keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Carbon Fiber Care
Carbon fiber composite parts can be washed and waxed like any other parts. Use a clear or black pigmented wax. See Composite Materials 0 157.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Moldings
Caution
Failure to clean and protect the bright metal moldings can result in a hazy white finish or pitting. This damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
The bright metal moldings on the vehicle are aluminum, chrome or stainless steel. To prevent damage always follow these cleaning instructions:
. Be sure the molding is cool to the touch before applying any cleaning solution.
. Use only approved cleaning solutions for aluminum, chrome or stainless steel. Some cleaners are highly acidic or contain alkaline substances and can damage the moldings.
. Always dilute a concentrated cleaner according to the manufacturer's instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are not intended for automotive use.
. Use a nonabrasive wax on the vehicle after washing to protect and extend the molding finish.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals, and Stripes
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth, and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps, lenses, emblems, decals, and stripes. Follow instructions under "Washing the Vehicle" previously in this section.
Lamp covers are made of plastic, and some have a UV protective coating. Do not clean or wipe them when dry.
Do not use any of the following on lamp covers:
. Abrasive or caustic agents.
. Washer fluids and other cleaning agents in higher concentrations than suggested by the manufacturer.
. Solvents, alcohols, fuels, or other harsh cleaners.
. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

VEHICLE CARE 295
. Aftermarket appearance caps or covers while the lamps are illuminated, due to excessive heat generated.
Caution
Failure to clean lamps properly can cause damage to the lamp cover that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Caution
Using wax on low gloss black finish stripes can increase the gloss level and create a non-uniform finish. Clean low gloss stripes with soap and water only.
Air Intakes Clear debris from the air intakes, between the hood and windshield, when washing the vehicle.

296 VEHICLE CARE
Shutter System
The vehicle may have a shutter system designed to help increase fuel economy. Keep the shutter system clean for proper operation. Windshield and Wiper Blades Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner. Clean rubber blades using a lint-free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades.

Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking.
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged. Damage can be caused by extreme dusty conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, snow, and ice.
Weatherstrips
Apply weatherstrip lubricant on weatherstrips to make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips at least once a year. Hot, dry climates may require more frequent application. Black marks from rubber material on painted surfaces can be removed by rubbing with a clean cloth. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 313.
Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to clean the tires.

Caution
Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle.
Wheels and Wheel Trim
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild soap and water to clean the wheels. After rinsing thoroughly with clean water, dry with a soft, clean towel. A wax may then be applied.
Caution
Chrome wheels and chrome wheel trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium chloride or calcium chloride. These are used on roads for conditions such as dust and ice. Always wash the chrome with soap and water after exposure.

Caution
To avoid surface damage on wheels and wheel trim, do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, or brushes. Use only GM approved cleaners. Do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash that uses silicon carbide tire/ wheel cleaning brushes. Damage could occur and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Brake System
Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect drum brake linings/ shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect all other brake parts.

Steering, Suspension, and Chassis Components
Visually inspect steering, suspension, and chassis components for damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear at least once a year.
Inspect power steering for proper attachment, connections, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
Visually check constant velocity joint boots and axle seals for leaks.
Body Component Lubrication
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the steel fuel door hinge, unless the components are plastic. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Underbody Maintenance
At least twice a year, spring and fall, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to thoroughly clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect.

VEHICLE CARE 297
Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or axles and should be replaced
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty.
Finish Damage
Quickly repair minor chips and scratches with touch-up materials available from your dealer to avoid corrosion. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer's body and paint shop.

298 VEHICLE CARE
Chemical Paint Spotting
Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted vehicle surfaces causing blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. See "Finish Care" previously in this section.
Interior Care
To prevent dirt particle abrasions, regularly clean the vehicle's interior. Immediately remove any soils. Newspapers or dark garments can transfer color to the vehicle's interior.
Use a soft bristle brush to remove dust from knobs and crevices on the instrument cluster. Using a mild soap solution, immediately remove hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect repellent from all interior surfaces or permanent damage may result.
Use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned to prevent permanent damage. Apply all cleaners directly to the cleaning cloth. Do not spray cleaners on any switches or controls. Remove cleaners quickly.

Before using cleaners, read and follow all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning the interior, open the doors and windows to get proper ventilation.
To prevent damage, do not clean the interior using the following cleaners or techniques:
. Never use a razor or any other sharp object to remove soil from any interior surface.
. Never use a brush with stiff bristles.
. Never rub any surface aggressively or with too much pressure.
. Do not use laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. For liquid cleaners, use approximately 20 drops per 3.8 L (1 gal) of water. A concentrated soap solution will create streaks and attract dirt. Do not use solutions that contain strong or caustic soap.
. Do not heavily saturate the upholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleaners containing solvents.
Interior Glass
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric dampened with water. Wipe droplets left behind with a clean dry cloth. If necessary, use a commercial glass cleaner after cleaning with plain water.
Caution
To prevent scratching, never use abrasive cleaners on automotive glass. Abrasive cleaners or aggressive cleaning may damage the rear window defogger.
Cleaning the windshield with water during the first three to six months of ownership will reduce tendency to fog.
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with water and mild soap.

Coated Moldings
Coated moldings should be cleaned.
. When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
. When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water.
Fabric/Carpet/Suede
Start by vacuuming the surface using a soft brush attachment. If a rotating vacuum brush attachment is being used, only use it on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as possible:
. Gently blot liquids with a paper towel. Continue blotting until no more soil can be removed.
. For solid soils, remove as much as possible prior to vacuuming.
To clean:
1. Saturate a clean, lint-free colorfast cloth with water. Microfiber cloth is recommended to prevent lint transfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture by gently wringing until water does not drip from the cleaning cloth.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center. Fold the cleaning cloth to a clean area frequently to prevent forcing the soil in to the fabric.
4. Continue gently rubbing the soiled area until there is no longer any color transfer from the soil to the cleaning cloth.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild soap solution followed only by plain water.
If the soil is not completely removed, it may be necessary to use a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small hidden area for colorfastness before using a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. If ring formation occurs, clean the entire fabric or carpet.
After cleaning, use a paper towel to blot excess moisture.

VEHICLE CARE 299
Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces and Vehicle Information and Radio Displays
Use a microfiber cloth on high gloss surfaces or vehicle displays. First, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt that can scratch the surface. Then gently clean by rubbing with a microfiber cloth. Never use window cleaners or solvents. Periodically hand wash the microfiber cloth separately, using mild soap. Do not use bleach or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly and air dry before next use.
Caution
Do not attach a device with a suction cup to the display. This may cause damage and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

300 VEHICLE CARE
Instrument Panel, Leather, Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces, Low Gloss Paint Surfaces, and Natural Open Pore Wood Surfaces
Use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with water to remove dust and loose dirt. For a more thorough cleaning, use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with a mild soap solution.
Caution
Soaking or saturating leather, especially perforated leather, as well as other interior surfaces, may cause permanent damage. Wipe excess moisture from these surfaces after cleaning and allow them to dry naturally. Never use heat, steam, or spot removers. Do not use cleaners that contain silicone or wax-based products. Cleaners containing these solvents can permanently change the appearance and feel of leather or soft trim, and are not recommended.

Do not use cleaners that increase gloss, especially on the instrument panel. Reflected glare can decrease visibility through the windshield under certain conditions.
Caution
Use of air fresheners may cause permanent damage to plastics and painted surfaces. If an air freshener comes in contact with any plastic or painted surface in the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution. Damage caused by air fresheners would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Cargo Cover and Convenience Net
If equipped, wash with warm water and mild detergent. Do not use chlorine bleach. Rinse with cold water, and then dry completely.
Care of Seat Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning
Do not bleach or dye seat belt webbing. It may severely weaken the webbing. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean and rinse seat belt webbing only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Allow the webbing to dry.
Floor Mats
{ Warning
If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the pedals. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/ or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals.
Use the following guidelines for proper floor mat usage.

. The original equipment floor mats were designed for your vehicle. If the floor mats need replacing, it is recommended that GM certified floor mats be purchased. Non-GM floor mats may not fit properly and may interfere with the pedals. Always check that the floor mats do not interfere with the pedals.
. Do not use a floor mat if the vehicle is not equipped with a floor mat retainer on the driver side floor.
. Use the floor mat with the correct side up. Do not turn it over.
. Do not place anything on top of the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on top of another.
The floor mats are held in place by button-type retainers.

Removing and Replacing the Floor Mats
1. Pull up on the rear of the floor mat to unlock the retainers and remove.
2. Reinstall by lining up the floor mat retainer openings over the carpet retainers and snap into position.
3. Make sure the floor mat is properly secured in place. Verify the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals.

VEHICLE CARE 301

302 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

Service and Maintenance
General Information General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Special Application Services Special Application Services . . . . . 309
Additional Maintenance and Care
Additional Maintenance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Maintenance Records Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

General Information
Your vehicle is an important investment. This section describes the required maintenance for the vehicle. Follow this schedule to help protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance. It may also help to maintain the value of the vehicle if it is sold. It is the responsibility of the owner to have all required maintenance performed.
Your dealer has trained technicians who can perform required maintenance using genuine replacement parts. They have up-to-date tools and equipment for fast and accurate diagnostics. Many dealers have extended evening and Saturday hours, courtesy transportation, and online scheduling to assist with service needs.
Your dealer recognizes the importance of providing competitively priced maintenance and repair services. With trained technicians, the dealer is the place for routine maintenance such as oil changes and tire rotations and

additional maintenance items like tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper blades.
Caution
Damage caused by improper maintenance can lead to costly repairs and may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, recommended fluids, and lubricants are important to keep the vehicle in good working condition.
Do not have chemical flushes that are not approved by GM performed on the vehicle. The use of flushes, solvents, cleaners, or lubricants that are not approved by GM could damage the vehicle, requiring expensive repairs that are not covered by the vehicle warranty.
The Tire Rotation and Required Services are the responsibility of the vehicle owner. It is recommended to have your dealer perform these services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.

Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition, improves fuel economy, and reduces vehicle emissions.
Because of the way people use vehicles, maintenance needs vary. There may need to be more frequent checks and services. The Additional Required Services - Normal are for vehicles that:
. Carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 154.
. Are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.
. Use the recommended fuel. See Recommended Fuel (LSY 2.0L L4 Turbo Engine) 0 221 or Recommended Fuel (L3B 2.7L L4 Turbo Engine) 0 221.
Refer to the information in the Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Normal chart.
The Additional Required Services Severe are for vehicles that are:

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 303

. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic in hot weather.
. Mainly driven in hilly or mountainous terrain.
. Used for high speed or competitive driving.
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery service.
Refer to the information in the Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Severe chart.
{ Warning
Performing maintenance work can be dangerous and can cause serious injury. Perform maintenance work only if the required information, proper tools, and equipment are available. If they are not, see your dealer to have a trained technician do the work. See Doing Your Own Service Work 0 235.

Maintenance Schedule
Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil 0 241.
Once a Month
. Check the tire inflation pressures. See Tire Pressure 0 275.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See Tire Inspection 0 281.
. Check the windshield washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid 0 252.
Engine Oil Change
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays, have the engine oil and filter changed within the next 1 000 km (600 mi ). If driven under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate the need for vehicle service for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and the oil life system must be reset. Your trained dealer technician can perform this work. If the engine oil life system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within 5 000 km (3,000 mi)

304 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

since the last service. Reset the oil life system when the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System 0 243.

. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 245.

Air Conditioning Desiccant (Replace Every Seven Years)
The air conditioning system requires maintenance every seven years. This service requires replacement of the desiccant to help the longevity and efficient operation of the air conditioning system. This service can be complex. See your dealer.
Tire Rotation and Required Services Every 12 000 km (7,500 mi)
Rotate the tires, if recommended for the vehicle, and perform the following services. See Tire Rotation 0 281.
. Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. If needed, change engine oil and filter, and reset oil life system. See Engine Oil 0 241 and Engine Oil Life System 0 243.

. Check engine coolant level. See Cooling System 0 246.
. Check windshield washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid 0 252.
. Check tire inflation pressures. See Tire Pressure 0 275.
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire Inspection 0 281.
. Visually check for fluid leaks.
. Inspect brake system. See Exterior Care 0 293.
. Visually inspect steering, suspension, and chassis components for damage, including cracks or tears in the rubber boots, loose or missing parts, or signs of wear at least once a year. See Exterior Care 0 293.
. Inspect power steering for proper attachment, connections, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

. Visually inspect halfshafts and drive shafts for excessive wear, lubricant leaks, and/or damage including: tube dents or cracks, constant velocity joint or universal joint looseness, cracked or missing boots, loose or missing boot clamps, center bearing excessive looseness, loose or missing fasteners, and axle seal leaks.
. Check restraint system components. See Safety System Check 0 50.
. Visually inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
. Visually inspect exhaust system and nearby heat shields for loose or damaged parts.
. Lubricate body components. See Exterior Care 0 293.
. Check starter switch. See Starter Switch Check 0 255.
. Check parking brake and automatic transmission park mechanism. See Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check 0 256.

. Check accelerator pedal for damage, high effort, or binding. Replace if needed.
. Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear, cracks, or other damage. Check the hold open ability of the strut. If the hold open is low, service the gas strut. See Gas Strut(s) 0 257.
. Inspect sunroof track and seal, if equipped. See Sunroof 0 31.

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 305

306 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

12 000 km/7,500 mi 24 000 km/15,000 mi 36 000 km/22,500 mi 48 000 km/30,000 mi 60 000 km/37,500 mi 72 000 km/45,000 mi 84 000 km/52,500 mi 96 000 km/60,000 mi 108 000 km/67,500 mi 120 000 km/75,000 mi 132 000 km/82,500 mi 144 000 km/90,000 mi 156 000 km/97,500 mi 168 000 km/105,000 mi 180 000 km/112,500 mi 192 000 km/120,000 mi 204 000 km/127,500 mi 216 000 km/135,000 mi 228 000 km/142,500 mi 240 000 k m/150,000 mi

Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services Normal

Rotate tires, if recommended for the vehicle, and

perform Required Services. (1) Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. Change engine oil and filter,

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

if needed.

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (2)

@

@

@

@

@

@

Inspect evaporative control system. (3)

@

@

@

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (4)

@

@

@

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires and/or boots.

@

@

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with AWD. (5)

@

Change rear axle fluid, if equipped with limited slip differential. (5)

@

@

@

Change rear axle fluid, without limited slip differential. (5)

@

Change front axle fluid, if equipped with AWD. (5)

@

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (6)

@

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (7)

@

Replace brake fluid. (8)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (9)

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. (10)

@

@

Replace air conditioning desiccant. (11)

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 307

Footnotes -- Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services Normal
(1) Vehicles with different size front and rear tires do not have tire rotation. See Tire Rotation 0 281.
(2) Or every two years, whichever comes first. More frequent passenger compartment air filter replacement may be needed if driving in areas with heavy traffic, poor air quality, high dust levels, or environmental allergens. Passenger compartment air filter replacement may also be needed if there is reduced airflow, window fogging, or odors. Your GM dealer can help determine when to replace the filter.
(3) Visually check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper attachment, connection, routing, and condition.
(4) Or every four years, whichever comes first. If driving in dusty conditions, inspect the filter at each oil change or more often as needed. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 245.

(5) Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or axles and should be replaced.
(6) Or every five years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System 0 246.
(7) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. Inspect for fraying, excessive cracking, or damage; replace, if needed.
(8) Replace brake fluid every five years. See Brake Fluid 0 253.
(9) Or every 12 months, whichever comes first. See Wiper Blade Replacement 0 256.
(10) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. See Gas Strut(s) 0 257.
(11) Replace air conditioning desiccant every seven years.

308 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

12 000 km/7,500 mi 24 000 km/15,000 mi 36 000 km/22,500 mi 48 000 km/30,000 mi 60 000 km/37,500 mi 72 000 km/45,000 mi 84 000 km/52,500 mi 96 000 km/60,000 mi 108 000 km/67,500 mi 120 000 km/75,000 mi 132 000 km/82,500 mi 144 000 km/90,000 mi 156 000 km/97,500 mi 168 000 km/105,000 mi 180 000 km/112,500 mi 192 000 km/120,000 mi 204 000 km/127,500 mi 216 000 km/135,000 mi 228 000 km/142,500 mi 240 000 km/150,000 mi

Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services Severe

Rotate tires, if recommended for the vehicle, and

perform Required Services. (1) Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. Change engine oil and filter,

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

if needed.

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (2)

@

@

@

@

@

@

Inspect evaporative control system. (3)

@

@

@

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (4)

@

@

@

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires and/or boots.

@

@

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.

@

@

@

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with AWD. (5)

@

@

@

Change rear axle fluid, if equipped with limited slip differential. (5)

@

@

@

Change rear axle fluid, without limited slip differential. (5)

@

@

Change front axle fluid, if equipped with AWD. (5)

@

@

@

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (6)

@

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (7)

@

Replace brake fluid. (8)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (9)

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. (10)

@

@

Replace air conditioning desiccant. (11)

Footnotes -- Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services Severe
(1) Vehicles with different size front and rear tires do not have tire rotation. See Tire Rotation 0 281.
(2) Or every two years, whichever comes first. More frequent passenger compartment air filter replacement may be needed if driving in areas with heavy traffic, poor air quality, high dust levels, or environmental allergens. Passenger compartment air filter replacement may also be needed if there is reduced airflow, window fogging, or odors. Your GM dealer can help determine when to replace the filter.
(3) Visually check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper attachment, connection, routing, and condition.
(4) Or every four years, whichever comes first. If driving in dusty conditions, inspect the filter at each oil change or more often as needed. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 245.

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 309

(5) Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or axles and should be replaced.
(6) Or every five years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System 0 246.
(7) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. Inspect for fraying, excessive cracking, or damage; replace, if needed.

Special Application Services
. Severe Commercial Use Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis components every oil change.
. Have underbody flushing service performed. See "Underbody Maintenance" in Exterior Care 0 293.

(8) Replace brake fluid every five years. See Brake Fluid 0 253.

(9) Or every 12 months, whichever comes first. See Wiper Blade Replacement 0 256.

(10) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. See Gas Strut(s) 0 257.

(11) Replace air conditioning desiccant every seven years.

310 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

Additional Maintenance and Care

. To avoid break-down or failure to start the vehicle, maintain a battery with full cranking power.

Your vehicle is an important investment and caring for it properly may help to avoid future costly repairs. To maintain vehicle performance, additional maintenance services may be required.
It is recommended that your dealer perform these services -- their trained dealer technicians know your vehicle best. Your dealer can also perform a thorough assessment with a multi-point inspection to recommend when your vehicle may need attention.
The following list is intended to explain the services and conditions to look for that may indicate services are required.
Battery
The 12-volt battery supplies power to start the engine and operate any additional electrical accessories.

. Trained dealer technicians have the diagnostic equipment to test the battery and ensure that the connections and cables are corrosion-free.
Belts
. Belts may need replacing if they squeak or show signs of cracking or splitting.
. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment to inspect the belts and recommend adjustment or replacement when necessary.
Brakes
Brakes stop the vehicle and are crucial to safe driving.
. Signs of brake wear may include chirping, grinding, or squealing noises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment to inspect the brakes and recommend quality parts engineered for the vehicle.
Fluids
Proper fluid levels and approved fluids protect the vehicle's systems and components. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 313 for GM approved fluids.
. Engine oil and windshield washer fluid levels should be checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may come on to indicate that fluids may be low and need to be filled.
Hoses
Hoses transport fluids and should be regularly inspected to ensure that there are no cracks or leaks. With a multi-point inspection, your dealer can inspect the hoses and advise if replacement is needed.

Lamps
Properly working headlamps, taillamps, and brake lamps are important to see and be seen on the road.
. Signs that the headlamps need attention include dimming, failure to light, cracking, or damage. The brake lamps need to be checked periodically to ensure that they light when braking.
. With a multi-point inspection, your dealer can check the lamps and note any concerns.
Shocks and Struts
Shocks and struts help aid in control for a smoother ride.
. Signs of wear may include steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longer stopping distance, or uneven tire wear.
. As part of the multi-point inspection, trained dealer technicians can visually inspect the shocks and struts for signs of

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 311

leaking, blown seals, or damage, and can advise when service is needed.

protect the vehicle's interior and exterior, see Interior Care 0 298 and Exterior Care 0 293.

Tires

Wheel Alignment

Tires need to be properly inflated, rotated, and balanced. Maintaining the tires can save money and fuel, and can reduce the risk of tire failure.
. Signs that the tires need to be replaced include three or more visible treadwear indicators; cord or fabric showing through the rubber; cracks or cuts in the tread or sidewall; or a bulge or split in the tire.
. Trained dealer technicians can inspect and recommend the right tires. Your dealer can also provide tire/wheel balancing services to ensure smooth vehicle operation at all speeds. Your dealer sells and services name brand tires.
Vehicle Care
To help keep the vehicle looking like new, vehicle care products are available from your dealer. For information on how to clean and

Wheel alignment is critical for ensuring that the tires deliver optimal wear and performance.
. Signs that the alignment may need to be adjusted include pulling, improper vehicle handling, or unusual tire wear.
. Your dealer has the required equipment to ensure proper wheel alignment.
Windshield
For safety, appearance, and the best viewing, keep the windshield clean and clear.
. Signs of damage include scratches, cracks, and chips.
. Trained dealer technicians can inspect the windshield and recommend proper replacement if needed.

312 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
Wiper Blades
Wiper blades need to be cleaned and kept in good condition to provide a clear view.
. Signs of wear include streaking, skipping across the windshield, and worn or split rubber.
. Trained dealer technicians can check the wiper blades and replace them when needed.

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 313

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Fluids and lubricants identified below by name or specification, including fluids or lubricants not listed here, can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage

Fluid/Lubricant

Automatic Transmission (8-Speed Transmission)

DEXRON-HP Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission (10-Speed DEXRON ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid. Transmission)

Chassis Lubrication

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. See Cooling System 0 246.

Engine Oil

Engine oil meeting the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 full synthetic is recommended. See Engine Oil 0 241.

Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Latch, Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668) or lubricant meeting Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Release Pawl requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hydraulic Brake System

DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid.

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood and Door Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241). Hinges

Rear Axle/Front Axle (All-Wheel Drive) See your dealer.

314 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

Usage Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive)
Weatherstrip Conditioning Windshield Washer

Fluid/Lubricant
Transfer Case Fluid. See your dealer.
Weatherstrip Lubricant. See your dealer.
Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection requirements.

Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part

GM Part Number

ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

2.0L L4 engine

84498926

A3245C

2.7L L4 engine

84498926

A3245C

Engine Oil Filter

2.0L L4 engine

55495105

PF66

2.7L L4 engine

55495105

PF66

Passenger Compartment Air Filter

Particulate

13508023

CF185

Carbon

23195727

CF184

Part Spark Plugs
2.0L L4 engine 2.7L L4 engine Wiper Blades Driver Side ­ 55 cm (22 in) Passenger Side ­ 45 cm (18 in)

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 315

GM Part Number

ACDelco Part Number

55504354 12688094

41­103­IP 41­106­IP

84613732

--

84574892

--

316 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Records

After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Date

Odometer Reading

Serviced By Maintenance Stamp

Services Performed

Technical Data
Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Service Parts Identification . . . . . . 317
Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications . . . . 318 Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . 320

Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver side of the vehicle. It can be seen through the windshield from outside. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and certificates of title and registration.

TECHNICAL DATA 317
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See "Engine Specifications" under Capacities and Specifications 0 318 for the vehicle's engine code.
Service Parts Identification
There may be a large barcode on the certification label on the center pillar that you can scan for the following information:
. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
. Model designation
. Paint information
. Production options
If there is not a large barcode on this label, then you will find this same information on a label inside of the trunk.

318 TECHNICAL DATA
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Engine Cooling System* 2.0L L4 engine 2.7L L4 engine
Engine Oil with Filter 2.0L L4 engine 2.7L L4 engine
Fuel Tank Transfer Case ­ AWD Rear Axle (without limited-slip) Rear Axle (with limited-slip) Rear Axle (with mechanical limited-slip) Front Axle ­ AWD

Capacities

Metric

English

For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.

10.4 L 13.0 L

11.0 qt 13.7 qt

5.0 L 5.7 L 66.0 L 0.78 L 0.75 L 1.0 L 1.0 L 0.4 L

5.3 qt 6.0 qt 17.5 gal 0.8 qt 0.79 qt 1.0 qt 1.0 qt 0.42 qt

TECHNICAL DATA 319

Application

Metric

Capacities

English

Wheel Nut Torque

140 Y

100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

*Engine cooling system capacity values are based on the entire cooling system and its components.

Engine Specifications

Engine

VIN Code

Transmission

Spark Plug Gap

2.0L L4 Turbo Engine (LSY)

K

Automatic

0.65­0.75 mm (0.025­0.030 in)

2.7L L4 Turbo Engine (L3B)

L

Automatic

0.65­0.75 mm (0.025­0.030 in)

Spark plug gaps are preset by the manufacturer. Re-gapping the spark plug is not recommended and can damage the spark plug.

320 TECHNICAL DATA Engine Drive Belt Routing
2.0L L4 Engine
2.7L L4 Engine

Customer Information
Customer Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Customer Assistance Offices . . . . 323 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . 324 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . 328 Publication Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . 331
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government . . . . . 331 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . 332

CUSTOMER INFORMATION 321

Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Customer Information

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by your dealer's sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of your dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by your dealership without

322 CUSTOMER INFORMATION

further help, in the U.S., call the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center at 1-800­458­8006. In Canada, call the Canadian Cadillac Customer Care Centre at 1-888-446-2000.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance representative:
. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.
. Dealership name and location.
. Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility. That is why we suggest following Step One first.
STEP THREE -- U.S. Owners : Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with the new

vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program administered by BBB National Programs, Inc. to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll-free telephone number or write them at the following address:

BBB Auto Line Program BBB National Programs, Inc. 3033 Wilson Boulevard Suite 600 Arlington, VA 22201
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 http://www.bbb.org/council/ programs-services/ dispute-handling-and-resolution/ bbb-auto-line
This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.
STEP THREE -- Canadian Owners : In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, General Motors of Canada Company wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge mediation/arbitration program. General Motors of Canada Company has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving

factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decision, should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the Cadillac Customer Care Centre, 1-888-446-2000, or write to:
General Motors Cadillac Customer Care Centre General Motors of Canada Company Mail Code: CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
The inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

CUSTOMER INFORMATION 323

Customer Assistance Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be addressed to:
United States and Puerto Rico
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P.O. Box 33169 Detroit, MI 48232-5169 www.Cadillac.com

Canada
General Motors of Canada Company Cadillac Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 www.gm.ca
1-888-446-2000 (English/French) Cadillac Roadside Service: 1-800-882-1112
Overseas
Contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

1-800-458-8006 1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Service: 1-800-224-1400

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

324 CUSTOMER INFORMATION

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-2622. TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

G : View maintenance schedules,
alerts, and Vehicle Diagnostic Information. Schedule service appointments.
I : View printable dealer-recorded
service records and self-recorded service records.
D : Select a dealer and view
locations, maps, phone numbers, and hours.
r : Track your vehicle's warranty
information.

Online Owner Center
Online Owner Experience (U.S.) my.cadillac.com
The Cadillac online owner experience allows access to videos, articles, and vehicle health specific to your Cadillac as well as your OnStar Account information all in one place.
Membership Benefits
E : Download owner's manuals and
view vehicle-specific how-to videos.

J : View active recalls or search by
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 0 317.
H : Compare and shop for Cadillac
and OnStar plans and services. View GM Card and SiriusXM information (if equipped).
F : Chat with online help
representatives.
See my.cadillac.com to register your vehicle.

Cadillac Owner Centre (Canada) mycadillac.ca Visit the Cadillac Owner Centre at mycadillac.ca (English) or my.cadillac.ca (French) to access similar benefits to the U.S. site.
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program
This program is available to qualified applicants for cost reimbursement, up to certain limits, of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for the vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle. To learn about the GM Mobility program, see www.gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance

Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text Telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility program. See www.gm.ca or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (800-463-7483) for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Service
U.S.: 1-800-224-1400.
Canada: 1-800-882-1112.
Text Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S. Only): 1-888-889-2438.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Service
When calling Roadside Service, have the following information ready:
. Your name, home address, and home telephone number
. Telephone number of your location
. Location of the vehicle

CUSTOMER INFORMATION 325

. Model, year, color, and license plate number of the vehicle
. Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
. Description of the problem
Coverage
Services are provided for the duration of the vehicle's powertrain warranty.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Service is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. General Motors North America and Cadillac reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Service program at any time without notification.
General Motors North America and Cadillac reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often, or the same type of claim is made many times.

Cadillac Owner PrivilegesTM
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
. Lock-Out Service: Service to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar. For security reasons, the driver must present identification before this service is given.
. Emergency Tow from a Public Road or Highway: Tow to the nearest Cadillac dealer for warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven. Assistance is not given when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
. Flat Tire Change: Service to change a flat tire with a spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped, must be in good condition and properly inflated. It is your responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.

326 CUSTOMER INFORMATION

. Battery Jump Start: Service to jump start a dead battery.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Service: If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the Powertrain warranty period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and rental car or a vehicle being delivered back to the customer, up to 500 miles.
Cadillac Technician Roadside Service (U.S. Only)

service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Services Not Included in Roadside Service
. Impound towing caused by violation of any laws
. Legal fines
. Mounting, dismounting, or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices

Cadillac's exceptional Roadside Service is more than an auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac owner in the United States with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide on-site service.
A dealer technician will travel to your location within a 30-mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership. If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Each technician travels with a specially equipped

Service is not provided if a vehicle is in an area that is not accessible to the service vehicle or is not a regularly traveled or maintained public road, which includes ice and winter roads. Off-road use is not covered.
Services Specific to Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is up to 7 liters. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Service: Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a copy of the repair orders are required. Once authorization has been received, the Roadside Service advisor will help you make arrangements and explain how to receive payment. Items considered are hotel, meals, and rental car or a vehicle being delivered back to the customer, up to 800 km.
. Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be provided right away, the Roadside Service advisor may give you permission to get local emergency road service. You will receive payment, up to $100, after sending the original receipt to Roadside Service. Mechanical failures may be covered, however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility.

Scheduling Service Appointments
When the vehicle requires warranty service, contact your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising the service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety related. If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If your dealer requests you to bring the vehicle for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same-day repair.

CUSTOMER INFORMATION 327

Courtesy Transportation Program
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada), extended powertrain, and/or hybrid-specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.
Several Courtesy Transportation options are available to assist in reducing inconvenience when warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate manual entitled "Limited Warranty and Owner Assistance Information" furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.

Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to do so, your dealer may offer the following transportation options:
Shuttle Service
This includes one-way or round-trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of your dealer's area.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If overnight warranty repairs are needed, and public transportation is used, the expense must be supported by original receipts and within the maximum amount allowed by GM. If U.S. customers arrange their own transportation, limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. See your dealer for information.

328 CUSTOMER INFORMATION

Courtesy Rental Vehicle
For an overnight warranty repair, the dealer may provide an available courtesy rental vehicle or provide for reimbursement of a rental vehicle. Reimbursement is limited and must be supported by original receipts as well as a signed and completed rental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. Additional fees such as fuel, rental vehicle insurance, taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair are also your responsibility.
It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer. Contact your dealer for specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If the vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish the vehicle resale value, and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which the vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are the best choice to ensure that the vehicle's designed appearance, durability, and safety are preserved.

The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain the vehicle's originally designed appearance and safety performance; however, the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not covered by the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for the vehicle. As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by the GM New Vehicle Limited

Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts is not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs. Your dealer may have a collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and state-of-the-art equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable equipment.
Insuring the Vehicle
Protect your investment in the GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to the GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we

CUSTOMER INFORMATION 329

recommend that you ensure that the vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing company may require you to have insurance that ensures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read the lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of the lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call emergency services for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of. Move the vehicle only if its position puts you in danger, or you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
Give only the necessary information to police and other parties involved in the crash.

For emergency towing see Roadside Service 0 325.
Gather the following information:
. Driver name, address, and telephone number
. Driver license number
. Owner name, address, and telephone number
. Vehicle license plate number
. Vehicle make, model, and model year
. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
. Insurance company and policy number
. General description of the damage to the other vehicle
Choose a reputable repair facility that uses quality replacement parts. See "Collision Parts" earlier in this section.
If the airbag has inflated, see What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? 0 56.

330 CUSTOMER INFORMATION

Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process
In the event that the vehicle requires damage repairs, GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take the vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by the GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with the repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember, if the vehicle is leased, you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance company is paying for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company's collision policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that company. In such cases, you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as the cost stays within reasonable limits.

Publication Ordering Information
Service Manuals
Service manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on the engine, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical system, steering system, body, etc.
Customer Literature
Owner's manuals are written specifically for owners and are intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner's manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Customer literature publications available for purchase include owner's manuals, warranty manuals, infotainment manuals, and portfolios. Portfolios include an owner's manual, warranty manual, infotainment manual, if applicable, and zip lock bag or pouch.

Current and Past Models
Service manuals and customer literature are available for many current and past model year GM vehicles.
To order, call 1-800-551-4123 Monday­Friday, 8:00 a.m.­6:00 p.m. eastern time
For credit card orders only (VISA, MasterCard, or Discover), see Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
To order by mail, write to:
Helm, Incorporated Attention: Customer Service 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, MI 48170
Make checks payable in U.S. funds.

Radio Frequency Statement
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio frequency that complies with Part 15/Part 18 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development (ISED) Canada's RSP-100 / ICES-GEN.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

CUSTOMER INFORMATION 331
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors.

332 CUSTOMER INFORMATION

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that the vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada immediately, and notify General Motors of Canada Company. Call Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0510; go to:
www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English)

www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French)

or write to:

Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Directorate Defect Investigations and Recalls Division 80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, notify General Motors.
In the U.S., call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P.O. Box 33169 Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005 General Motors of Canada Company 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
In Mexico, call 01-800-466-0805 or 01-800-212-234-5522.
In other Central America and Caribbean Countries, call 52-555-901-2369.

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
The vehicle has a number of computers that record information about the vehicle's performance and how it is driven or used. For example, the vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy them in a crash, and, if equipped, to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may store data to help the dealer technician service the vehicle or to help GM improve safety or features. Some modules may also store data about how the vehicle is operated, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may retain personal preferences, such as radio presets, seat positions, and temperature settings.

CUSTOMER INFORMATION 333

Cybersecurity
GM collects information about the use of your vehicle including operational and safety related information. We collect this information to provide, evaluate, improve, and troubleshoot our products and services and to develop new products and services. The protection of vehicle electronics systems and customer data from unauthorized outside electronic access or control is important to GM. GM maintains appropriate security standards, practices, guidelines and controls aimed at defending the vehicle and the vehicle service ecosystem against unauthorized electronic access, detecting possible malicious activity in related networks, and responding to suspected cybersecurity incidents in a timely, coordinated and effective manner. Security incidents could impact your safety or compromise your private data. To minimize security risks, please do not connect your vehicle electronic systems to unauthorized devices or connect your vehicle to any unknown or untrusted networks (such as Bluetooth, WIFI or similar

technology). In the event you suspect any security incident impacting your data or the safe operation of your vehicle, please stop operating your vehicle and contact your dealer.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

334 CUSTOMER INFORMATION

. How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Note
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access these data or share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in response to an official request by police or similar government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation through the discovery process; or, as required by law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes, where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar
If the vehicle is equipped with OnStar and has an active service plan, additional data may be collected and transmitted through the OnStar system. This includes information about the vehicle's operation; collisions involving the vehicle; the use of the vehicle and its features, including infotainment; and the location and approximate GPS speed of the vehicle. Refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions and Privacy Statement on the OnStar website.
See OnStar Additional Information 0 338.

Infotainment System
If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system as part of the infotainment system, use of the system may result in the storage of destinations, addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip information. See the infotainment manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions.

CUSTOMER INFORMATION 335

336 ONSTAR
OnStar
OnStar Overview OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
OnStar Services Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
OnStar Additional Information OnStar Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

OnStar Overview
= Voice Command Button Q Blue OnStar Button > Red Emergency Button
This vehicle may be equipped with a comprehensive, in-vehicle system that can connect to an OnStar Advisor for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Connections, and Diagnostics Services. OnStar services may require a paid service plan and data plan. OnStar requires the vehicle battery and electrical system, cellular service, and GPS satellite signals to be available and operating. OnStar acts as a link to existing emergency service providers. OnStar may collect information about you and your vehicle, including location information. See OnStar User Terms, Privacy Statement, and

Software Terms for more details including system limitations at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
The OnStar system status light is next to the OnStar buttons. If the status light is:
. Solid Green: System is ready.
. Flashing Green: On a call.
. Red: Indicates a problem.
. Off: System is off. Press Q twice
to speak with an OnStar Advisor.
Press Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an Advisor.
Functionality of the Voice Command button may vary by vehicle and region.
Press = to:
. Open the OnStar app on the infotainment display. See the infotainment manual for information on how to use the OnStar app.

Or
. Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation voice commands.
. Obtain and customize the Wi-Fi hotspot name or SSID and password, if equipped.
Press Q to connect to an Advisor to:
. Verify account information or update contact information.
. Get driving directions.
. Receive a Diagnostic check of the vehicle's key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Service.
. Manage Wi-Fi Settings, if equipped.
Press > to get a priority connection
to an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:
. Get help for an emergency.
. Be a Good Samaritan or respond to an AMBER Alert.
. Get assistance in severe weather or other crisis situations and find evacuation routes.

OnStar Services
Emergency
Emergency Services require an active safety and security plan. With Automatic Crash Response, built-in sensors can automatically alert a specially trained OnStar Advisor who is immediately connected in to the vehicle to help.
Press > for a priority connection to
an OnStar Advisor who can contact emergency service providers, direct them to your exact location, and relay important information.
With OnStar Crisis Assist, specially trained Advisors are available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to provide a central point of contact, assistance, and information during a crisis.
With Roadside Service, Advisors can locate a nearby service provider to help with a flat tire, a battery jump, or an empty gas tank.

ONSTAR 337
Security
If equipped, OnStar provides these services:
. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance, OnStar Advisors can use GPS to pinpoint the vehicle and help authorities quickly recover it.
. With Remote Ignition Block, if equipped, OnStar can block the engine from being restarted.
. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown, if equipped, OnStar can work with law enforcement to gradually slow the vehicle down.
Theft Alarm Notification
If equipped, if the doors are locked and the vehicle alarm sounds, a notification by text, e-mail, or phone call will be sent. If the vehicle is stolen, an OnStar Advisor can work with authorities to recover the vehicle.

338 ONSTAR
OnStar Additional Information
In-Vehicle Audio Messages
Audio messages may play important information at the following times:
. Prior to vehicle purchase. Press Q
to set up an account.
. After change in ownership and at 90 days.
Transferring Service
Press Q to request account transfer
eligibility information. The Advisor can cancel or change account information.
Selling/Transferring the Vehicle
Call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) immediately to terminate your OnStar or connected services if the vehicle is disposed of, sold, transferred, or if the lease ends.

Reactivation for Subsequent Owners
Press Q and follow the prompts to
speak to an Advisor as soon as possible. The Advisor will update vehicle records and explain OnStar or connected service options.
How OnStar Service Works
Automatic Crash Response, Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Remote Services, and Roadside Service are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar services are available everywhere or on all vehicles. For more information, a full description of OnStar services, system limitations, and OnStar User Terms, Privacy Statement, and Software Terms:
. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
. Press Q to speak with an Advisor.

OnStar or connected services cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area. The wireless service provider must also have coverage, network capacity, reception, and technology compatible with OnStar or connected services. Service involving location information about the vehicle cannot work unless GPS signals are available, unobstructed, and compatible with the OnStar hardware. OnStar or connected services may not work if the OnStar equipment is not properly installed or it has not been properly maintained. If equipment or software is added, connected, or modified, OnStar or connected services may not work. Other problems beyond the control of OnStar -- such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather, electrical system design and architecture of the vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone network congestion or jamming -- may prevent service.
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 331.

Services for People with Disabilities
Advisors provide services to help with physical disabilities and medical conditions.
Press Q to help:
. Locate a gas station with an attendant to pump gas.
. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc., that meets accessibility needs.
. Provide directions to the closest hospital or pharmacy in urgent situations.
TTY Users
OnStar has the ability to communicate to deaf, hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired customers while in the vehicle. The available dealer-installed TTY system can provide in-vehicle access to all OnStar services, except Virtual Advisor and OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
If equipped, TTY mode can be turned on or off by touching Settings, then Apps, and then Phone. When TTY

mode is on, phone calls can be made or received with OnStar using the infotainment display.
OnStar Personal Identification Number (PIN)
A PIN is needed to access some OnStar services. The PIN will need to be changed the first time when speaking with an Advisor. To change the OnStar PIN, contact an OnStar
Advisor by pressing Q or calling
1-888-4ONSTAR.
Warranty
OnStar equipment may be warranted as part of the vehicle warranty.
Languages
The vehicle can be programmed to respond in multiple languages. Press
Q and ask for an Advisor. Advisors
are available in English, Spanish, and French. Available languages may vary by country.

ONSTAR 339
Potential Issues
OnStar cannot perform Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the vehicle has been off continuously for 10 days without an ignition cycle. If the vehicle has not been started for 10 days, OnStar can contact Roadside Service or a locksmith to help gain access to the vehicle.
Global Positioning System (GPS)
. Obstruction of the GPS can occur in a large city with tall buildings; in parking garages; around airports; in tunnels and underpasses; or in an area with very dense trees. If GPS signals are not available, the OnStar system should still operate to call OnStar. However, OnStar could have difficulty identifying the exact location.
. In emergency situations, OnStar can use the last stored GPS location to send to emergency responders.

340 ONSTAR
A temporary loss of GPS can cause loss of the ability to send a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. The Advisor may give a verbal route or may ask for a call back after the vehicle is driven into an open area.
Cellular and GPS Antennas
Cellular reception is required for OnStar to send remote signals to the vehicle. Do not place items over or near the antenna to prevent blocking cellular and GPS signal reception.
Unable to Connect to OnStar Message
If there is limited cellular coverage or the cellular network has reached maximum capacity, this message may
come on. Press Q to try the call again
or try again after driving a few miles into another cellular area.
Vehicle and Power Issues
OnStar services require a vehicle electrical system, wireless service, and GPS satellite technologies to be available and operating for features to

function properly. These systems may not operate if the battery is discharged or disconnected.
Add-on Electrical Equipment
The OnStar system is integrated into the electrical architecture of the vehicle. Do not add any electrical equipment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 231. Added electrical equipment may interfere with the operation of the OnStar system and cause it to not operate.
Vehicle Software Updates
OnStar or GM may remotely deliver software updates or changes to the vehicle without further notice or consent. These updates or changes may enhance or maintain safety, security, or the operation of the vehicle or the vehicle systems. Software updates or changes may affect or erase data or settings that are stored in the vehicle, such as saved navigation destinations or pre-set radio stations. Neither OnStar nor GM is responsible for any affected or erased data or settings. These updates or changes may also collect

personal information. Such collection is described in the OnStar privacy statement or separately disclosed at the time of installation. These updates or changes may also cause a system to automatically communicate with GM servers to collect information about vehicle system status, identify whether updates or changes are available, or deliver updates or changes. An active OnStar agreement constitutes consent to these software updates or changes and agreement that either OnStar or GM may remotely deliver them to the vehicle.
Privacy
The complete OnStar Privacy Statement may be found at www.onstar.com (U.S.), or www.onstar.ca (Canada). We recommend that you review it. If you have any questions, call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or
press Q to speak with an Advisor.
Users of wireless communications are cautioned that the privacy of any information sent via wireless cellular communications cannot be assured.

Third parties may unlawfully intercept or access transmissions and private communications without consent.
OnStar - Software Acknowledgements
To obtain the source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL, and other open source licenses, that is contained in this product, please visit http:// opensource.lge.com. In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers, and copyright notices are available for download. This offer is valid for a period of three years after our last shipment of this product. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.
*Provided through LG Electronics Inc., who is solely responsible for provisions of related OSS compliance.

ONSTAR 341

342 CONNECTED SERVICES
Connected Services
Connected Services Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Connected Services
Navigation
Navigation requires a specific OnStar or connected service plan.
Press Q to receive Turn-by-Turn
directions or have them sent to the vehicle's navigation screen, if equipped.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation
1. Press Q to connect to an
Advisor.
2. Request directions to be downloaded to the vehicle.
3. Follow the voice-guided commands.
Using Voice Commands During a Planned Route
Functionality of the Voice Command button, if equipped, may vary by vehicle and region. For some vehicles,
press = to open the OnStar app on
the infotainment display. For other
vehicles press = as follows.

Cancel Route
1. Press =. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone.
2. Say "Cancel route." System responds: "Do you want to cancel directions?"
3. Say "Yes." System responds: "OK, request completed, thank you, goodbye."
Route Preview
1. Press =. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone.
2. Say "Route preview." System responds with the next three maneuvers.
Repeat
1. Press =. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone.
2. Say "Repeat." System responds with the last direction given, then responds with "OnStar ready," then a tone.

Get My Destination
1. Press =. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone.
2. Say "Get my destination." System responds with the address and distance to the destination, then responds with "OnStar ready," then a tone.
Send Destination to Vehicle
Directions can be sent to the vehicle's navigation screen, if equipped.
Press Q, then ask the Advisor to
download directions to the vehicle's navigation system, if equipped. After the call ends, the navigation screen will provide prompts to begin driving directions. Routes that are sent to the navigation screen can only be canceled through the navigation system.
See www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Connections
The following services help with staying connected.

For coverage maps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Ensuring Security
. Change the default passwords for the Wi-Fi hotspot and myCadillac mobile app. Make these passwords different from each other and use a combination of letters and numbers to increase the security.
. Change the default name of the SSID (Service Set Identifier). This is your network's name that is visible to other wireless devices. Choose a unique name and avoid family names or vehicle descriptions.
Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)
The vehicle may have a built-in Wi-Fi hotspot that provides access to the Internet and web content at 4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobile devices can be connected. A data plan is required. Use the in-vehicle controls only when it is safe to do so.

CONNECTED SERVICES 343
1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspot
information, press = to open
the OnStar app on the infotainment display, then select Wi-Fi Hotspot. On some vehicles, touch Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Settings on the screen.
2. The Wi-Fi settings will display the Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID), password, and on some vehicles, the connection type (no Internet connection, 3G, 4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality (poor, good, excellent).
3. To change the SSID or password,
press Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR
to connect with an Advisor. On some vehicles, the SSID and password can be changed in the Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.
After initial set-up, your vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot will connect automatically to your mobile devices. Manage data usage by turning Wi-Fi on or off on your mobile device, by using the myCadillac mobile app, or by contacting an OnStar Advisor.

344 CONNECTED SERVICES
On some vehicles, Wi-Fi can also be managed from the Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.
MyCadillac Mobile App (If Available)
Download the myCadillac mobile app to compatible Apple and Android smartphones. Cadillac users can access the following services from a smartphone:
. Remotely start/stop the vehicle, if factory-equipped.
. Lock/unlock doors, if equipped with automatic locks.
. Activate the horn and lamps.
. Check the vehicle's fuel level, oil life, or tire pressure, if factory-equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor System.
. Send destinations to the vehicle.
. Locate the vehicle on a map (U.S. market only).
. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot on/off, manage settings, and monitor data consumption, if equipped.

. Locate a dealer and schedule service.
. Request Roadside Service.
. Set a parking reminder with pin drop, take a photo, make a note, and set a timer.
. Connect with Cadillac on social media.
Features are subject to change. For myCadillac mobile app information and compatibility, see my.cadillac.com.
An active OnStar or connected service plan may be required. A compatible device, factory-installed remote start, and power locks are required. Data rates apply. See www.onstar.com for details and system limitations.
Remote Services
Contact an OnStar Advisor to unlock the doors or sound the horn and flash the lamps.
Marketplace
OnStar Advisors can provide offers from restaurants and retailers on your route, help locate hotels, or book a room. These services vary by market.

Diagnostics
By monitoring and reporting on the vehicle's key systems, OnStar Advanced Diagnostics, if equipped, provides a way to keep up on maintenance. Capabilities vary by model. See www.onstar.com for details and system limitations. Features are subject to change. For updates on feature capabilities, see my.cadillac.com. Message and data rates may apply.

Index

A Accessories and Modifications . . . . . 235 Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Active Fuel Management . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . 231 Additional Information
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 245 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Air Filter, Passenger Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . .55 Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . .57 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . .55 What Will You See after an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . .53

INDEX 345
Airbags Adding Equipment to the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . . .99 Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Servicing Airbag-Equipped Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Alarm Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Alert Lane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Rear Pedestrian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . 217
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178, 255 Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . 179
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Assistance Systems for Driving . . . . 210 Assistance Systems for Parking and Backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Auto Stop Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Automatic Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

346 INDEX
Automatic (cont'd) Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Emergency Braking (AEB) . . . . . . . . 213 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 171 Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Vehicle Hold Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Automatic Transmission Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 177
Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH) . . . . 181
B Battery
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Battery - North America . . . . . .254, 288 Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . . . . . 256 Brake Electric Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Parking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Braking (cont'd) Automatic Emergency (AEB) . . . . . 213
Braking System Front Pedestrian (FPB) . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Bulb Replacement
Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . 259 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
C Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .234, 254, 288, Back Cover
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . 318 Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . . . . .2 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Charging
Wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Check
Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Child Restraints Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . .65 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76, 78 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Climate Control Systems Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Compartments Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . . . . . 189 Composite Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Connected Services
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Connections Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Control Traction and Electronic
Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Coolant
Engine Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . .97 Engine Temperature Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Cornering Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Cruise Control, Adaptive . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 324 Customer Information Publications Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
D Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . . . . .2 Data Collection
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . 127 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Diagnostics Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

INDEX 347
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . 320 Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 255 Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . 203 Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Driver Mode Control Light . . . . . . . . . 106 Driving
Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Competitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 151 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Track Events and Competitive . . . 146 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

348 INDEX
Driving (cont'd) Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Dual Automatic Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
E Electric Brake Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . . . . 102 Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . 231 Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . 260 Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . 262 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Emergency
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Check Light (Malfunction
Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . 238 Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . .97 Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Engine (cont'd) Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . . . 127 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . 132
F Filter,
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . 128 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Fluid Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 244 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Frequency Statement
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Front Seats
Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . 259 Fuel
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Economy, Driving for Better . . . . . 142 Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 107 Management, Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Top Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Fuses Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . 260 Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . 262 Rear Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
G Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . .97 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Warning Lights and Indicators . . . .92 General Information Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . 302 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

H Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . 128 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Headlamps
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . 127 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Heated and Ventilated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Heater Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . 151

INDEX 349
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 How to Wear Seat Belts Properly . . . 45 HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
I Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Indicator
Pedestrian Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Infants and Young Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Information Publication Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . .5 Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
J Jump Starting - North America . . . . 288

350 INDEX
K Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
L Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Lamps
Cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . 127 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . 127 Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Malfunction Indicator (Check
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Lane Keep Assist Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 LATCH System Replacing Parts after a Crash . . . . . .76

LATCH, Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Lighting
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Lights Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Automatic Vehicle Hold . . . . . . . . . . 103 Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Check Engine (Malfunction
Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . 127 Lane Keep Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Lights (cont'd) Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Service Electric Parking Brake . . . 102 StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . 70 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

M Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Maintenance and Care
Additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . 100 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176, 177 Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Messages
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Mirrors Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Automatic Dimming Rearview . . . . .28 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Driver Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Monitor System, Tire Pressure . . . . . 277
N Navigation
Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
O Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 OnStar Additional Information . . . . 338 OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Outlets Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Overview Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

INDEX 351
P Park
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Parking
Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Parking or Backing Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . 57 Pedestrian Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . 104 Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . . . . . 235 Personalization Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . 163 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

352 INDEX
Power (cont'd) Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . 50 Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . 333 Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . 327 Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Proposition
65 Warning, California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234, 254, 288,
Back Cover Publication Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
R Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . 331 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Rear Pedestrian Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . 204 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Recommended
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Records Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . 293 Reimbursement Program, GM
Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Replacing LATCH System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Restraints Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Ride Control Systems Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Roads Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . 320 Run-Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
S Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . 327 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 How to Wear Seat Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Seats Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Heated and Ventilated Front . . . . . . .40 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . .36 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . .35 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Securing Child Restraints . . . . . . . 76, 78 Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Self-Sealing Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . 327 Service Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Services Special Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Shifting
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 164 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . 217 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . 129 Special Application Services . . . . . . . 309 Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . 318 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Start Assist, Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Storage Areas Cargo Management System . . . . . . . .83 Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Struts Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

INDEX 353
Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 System
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) . . . . 210 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 335 Systems Driver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
T Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . 324 Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 36 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 276 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

354 INDEX
Tires (cont'd) Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . 278 Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . 277 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Run-Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Self-Sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Terminology and Definitions . . . . 273 Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . 284 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Top Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Towing
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Track Events and Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . 105

Traction (cont'd) Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . 191 Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Transmission Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 171 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . 129
U Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . 284 Universal Remote System . . . . . . . . . . 121
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
V Vehicle
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Automatic Hold Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Vehicle (cont'd) Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . 317 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Vehicle Hold
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Vehicle Hold (AVH)
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
W Warning
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Warnings Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . 286 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . 282 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . 69 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Windshield Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 256 Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

INDEX 355

84186799 A


Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.550/W Unicode